Home

POWERSTUDIO SCADA USER MANUAL

1. 197 8 2 1 1 Screen comtrol cccccccccccssssscscssescscscescsescescscssuscscsevscscsevsssesssassesesacsesevacsesseacssseacsesecacsesecacseees 197 8 212 Report a E ee 198 8 2 1 3 D Device EUN 198 M Table Control renerne 198 8 2 1 5 Active Event Control ccccccccccscsscssscscscscsccscscscscscscsssesesessscscasavesesessssssacacavesesesssescacacaceeseseees 199 8 2 1 6 9 Event Viewer Control ettet treten 199 8 2 1 7 199 8 2 1 8 Variable Control tette 199 SLALI duln d cnie 200 8 2 1 10 P canera Conto ENT T Um 201 8 2 1 11 Common options for action tools 202 8 2 2 203 8 2 3 203 9 204 10 205 RENTED BI Soc 206 were ety rere nCE errr rs 207 208 209 210 10 3 EVENT CONFIGURATION 212 IOG E009 01S 216 10 3 1 1 PRT INCAS accor s 217 AA 218 10 3 2 1 lore a ner etree ee eon he ere
2. 238 22 7 DS DIGVIN GAA CVICE en a 241 DIO CHONG tut El v tie 249 12 2 8 1 INOUE E 254 172 2 0 2 dme cac d pet Ae d e ED Ec RENE TERY TT 257 V2 22650 ToP THOU und 250 12 284 Magnifying Glass Moderneissa peut duals saci Sua 260 1225535 tette iot dO ae eter noctu AO oe ot N 261 12 2 300 Grap POPES a sod dade ee redu ut bu vetas uff aite tatu bad udis Dua 263 12 2 97 cedo tote e 275 IM MN ppp 213 MN I o Puri P 275 E229 MAKETA TOS ode en A LU D D UNIS 260 12 2 10 265 12 2 11 nou ed CVCIES 267 12 2 12 setti cR RI Ed LEE IE LM 269 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ioi oo eto net oa Ep oo aeo Po ee des 291 APPENDICES ecc o9 292 ES SUI NI a 292 PN VOUI Oira En AAEE PES 293 TO qu Ut A BLA 294
3. E e e e a a a a If you click on one of the variables for example ___Activepower __ all the boxes for this variable will be selected 166 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Select variables wg arables ill Harmonics Instantaneous Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Current Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Inductive power Apparent power Power Factor Cosine phi Maximum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy Discriminated variable Ee te pe qe al SE ap tal E 71 EE al d Sd d LE D Es Je amp m mI E SEED B Ed Ww NM NM I w m M M M Finally clicking on E phases 1 2 and 3 instant maximum or minimum are selected according to the button pressed If all three phases are selected the button switches to I and when pressed the 3 phases are deselected Select variables wg arables ill Harmonics Instantaneous Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Curent Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Inductive power Apparent power Power Factor Cosine phi Maxinum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy Discriminated variable Ee Ee pe qe tal _ 15 eap ta 4 ESQ pu ca 1 ca Bm oM W
4. Allows configuration of numeric and binary variables of a file previously saved on the disk to be loaded This option is useful when the same variables have to be configured on several devices 9 eene Allows the configuration of numerical and binary variables to be saved on a disk and then loaded onto another Generic Modbus TCP device Allows advanced configuration options on the device to be shown or hidden Import configuration Export configuration Group the variables maximum in groups of Data in little endian Registers Accept Cancel Brings together variables in groups These parameters permit the maximum size of the frames to be configured in communications for those devices which do not permit communication with frames of a maximum size greater than that of the Standard modbus To carry out the minimum number of possible requests and thus penalise as little as possible the communication the programme will try to group together the variables configured in groups of variables This parameter can indicate the maximum grouping permitted Data in little endian By default the data sent by devices is considered to come in big endian If the device returns it in little endian this option should be enabled 3 27 1 1 1 Numeric variables Click the Add or Modify button and the dialogue will appear to configure the numeric variable Where Hew numeric var
5. Period Window type Fined Unit Active power g Maximeber reset e Period Is the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes e Type of window Type of window used to store the maximeter value it can be fixed or sliding e Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power Ill apparent power Ill current or phase current depending on the device 93 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Maximeter reset When the button is clicked the device maximeter goes to zero Distortion calculation THD Effective value t D fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion that the device will calculate can be configured Energy counters Reset On clicking the button the energy counters on the device will return to zero Alarms Variable Maximum Miniman Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 v 2 0 0 Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 2 Current L2 A 0 0 0 This section shows the configuration of the relay outputs of the device configuration is possible with the required values Variable The parameters associated with the relay are indicated in this field The output is programmed as an alarm and any of the parameters measured by the CVM BC can be controlled The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are indicated in brackets Max This box indicates the maximum value to control
6. 329 14 4 23 How can I produce sounds in response to an 329 14 4 24 How do I show documents in response to an 330 14 4 25 How can I communicate with TCP2RS converter by way of a 330 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 1 Running the Programme for the First Time When running for the first time the program will ask if you want to add devices PowerStudio 5cada 2 Do vou want En add devices to the program configuration Selecting Yes will allow us to add devices as will be explained later in section 2 2 2 1 Adding a First level Device When the device is added you will be asked if you want to add any more devices PowerStudio 5cada 2 iDo vou want to add a new device If Yes is chosen then a new device will be added otherwise normal running of the programme will start PowerStudio Scada File Setup Edit lt Bac LJ 3 Screen E Reports T d can be seen that the program consists of four distinct areas The main menu Situated at the top and gives access to all the functions of the programme Button bar Placed just below the main menu and gives fast access to the most frequently used functions Status bar Situated at the bottom it offers general information on the status of the application Main view Occupies the rest of th
7. frequency Distortion calculation Temperature 50Hz f AMS BOHz Fundamental CF Tariffs Synchronism type Number of tariffs intemal clack 1 Digital inputs Alarm date form change tariff 11 07 2008 gt 120527 First synchronism input Expansion card 1 Digital input 1 55 Calendar Accept Cancel Device Information Peripheral number 2 C Mk2 IT F 405 Identifier Version CVM 1 02 Description Shows general information Device Measure point Capture period min 1 Reset v Synchronise clock Measurement point Short description of the device for display and better identification on the device screen Capture period Data capture period in minutes for the generation of the log values when the equipment has an expansion card inserted in the memory Initialize energy counters Clicking on this button will reset the counters of the energy device Synchronize clock Clicking this button will synchronise the date and the time of the device with the date and time of the PC 100 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage 100 i 1 Current 50 i 5 Neutral current 5 Programming of the voltage transformation ratios current and neutral current of the device M aximeter Period n 5 Window type Sliding Masimeter reset Period Is the integration perio
8. a Ni DUE CER IM bU 168 Sd 170 Nm V TSO 2 3 E e 171 313 CO Uo LARES 174 6 CALCULATED VARIABLES CU ON Ee aea a Ee eu Slo CE NOR E Ea 176 FEM DB E E 179 7 1 ADD MODIFY AND DELETE 179 7 2 PORT DESIGN WINDOW Tm 180 CUP TRETEN 162 7 2 4 1 Select controls c ccccccscscscscscscscscscscscusscsescscssuessssssscscavaveserssessasavacsceuesesessscacavaveereseacscacaaee 182 7 2 1 2 a V EO 182 TO LS M a E E E TE cree ME 183 pev m 184 7 2 1 5 Formula control ccccccccccscsssscscsesscscsesscscsesccscscsecscsesescsesevacsesevacsesavacsesscscseuevsssssavacsesscacsesscsees 186 7 2 4 6 Conditioned control tenete terrre tette tette ten 187 7 2 1 7 Embedded Graphic AUCUNE T T 188 7 2 1 8 Common options for action 189 7 2 2 POSTION 190 7 2 3 P2410 191 7 2 4 EU UM FECE Ur 191 7 2 5 SENE 2 IT22 12017 R10 0 FREE iki 192 7 2 6 T E 193 ADA E E 194 8 1 RP MOV SCR N 194 8 2 EDIINGSCADASCREENS m 195 8 2 1
9. 44 3 2 Se Enos etiaai d tle tata RE dut oc ated ados umet tatus 45 32 4 DEVO T 45 Sli WEVICE 45 3 22 Display me Vales notes HU 46 3 3 TP CAMERA d aote adonde FAR Uo UNIV HE ota Aad 47 29d Addins qut IF CeT ie ftcut tates aant ef soto 47 3 4 CB TIL dl Rn TTC OPE 49 3 4 1 OP HONS duas obe oe Neon ru B rV RUE A ERA 49 JALIL De VicedPatametelsS T E E I Peu ust cu eec UM 49 NM MEC GOL T 49 SUN CBS AERA rum 51 3 4 2 DPO nts 53 3 5 ic E E 55 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada od IB unu Noni ERE 55 DEVE Sa quii adt Ip nanan I N 55 EM EI EU UE 58 CDR m rU 60 3 6 1 OPUONS 2 sesta deli utbs acinis 60 CM NEED 60 3 6 2 VOW QS 64 Sw ME C SVP dione ne a Alas Seta eos E E 66 3 7 1 Download with protocol IEC G70 5 102 3 attri ct t
10. Events Windows Internet Explorer m Oo http 192 168 1 11 8080 html events rss 4 Pir gt gt od Events te gt dh Page 1 Tools Events Displaying 10 10 You are viewing a feed that contains frequently updated content When you subscribe to a feed it is added to the Common Feed List Updated information from the feed is automatically downloaded to your computer and can be viewed in Internet Explorer and other programs Learn more about feeds e All 10 Subscribe to this feed M dM Subscribe to thi Sort by Date Title Voltage alert Activated Today October 08 2008 4 minutes ago Filter by category Voltage 0 Activated 5 Disabled 5 Voltage alert Disabled Voltage 0 Voltage alert Activated Voltage 0 Voltage alert Disabled Voltage 0 Voltage alert Activated m M NEU RNC URS v Done 100 Displaying the RSS news released by the Engine Editor on the Internet Explorer Of course there are other RSS readers who view the news in various forms for almost any environment imaginable including mobile devices PDAs etc Note that each incident must be configured if we want to publish RSS news related with it or not 28 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Client application Iv Enable menu and toolbar Start screen lt gt Permits the menu display and toolbar the Java Client to be enabled
11. 130 opsstabyattable Sto cate be eee et ea DE 132 COE mcr 133 LONS A EE E T A 133 3 28 1 1 Device parate E AE E 133 MDE VICES INPUT a 134 3 28 1 3 N soe nee ala sa uite valde 136 P en eee 137 DAIL DENET GS 137 3 29 1 1 DEVICE aeree 137 9205L 2 Deven San a aset pede 138 3 29 1 3 eu rette roe ocv to iniu a e enn 140 Ds ENDETE E a aet Ox 141 141 3 30 1 1 B on plored co REI ere een ee eee TEL ry 141 3 30 12 babe boa 143 3 30 1 3 CV 145 SOE oou netus die ule naa M 146 Del AD II AA TU Um 146 3 3 1 1 Device parameter tease estat cla nts ate dde diese Caste ee rec dad 146 DOL ME LED 149 BESTEN Daum P 149 3 32 1 4 tA Eu I ELE M
12. Shows an example of how the style will appear 21 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada The Delete button will only be active if there are styles selected from the style list Clicking the button will delete the styles selected 22 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 2 6 Image manager Using this option images used to create a SCADA screen or a report can be added modified or deleted The organization of the images is in the form of a tree so it can be classified into three different categories to be chosen by the user Manager images Image list i eis i it fi er 5 64 40 ql General screens m um oom 4 1 Secondary screens Switch UNIFIL UNIFIL2 LIMIFIL3 um Mew category mm Delete category uH Add image Eliminate images Ad Exit The left side of the dialogue corresponds to the categories defined The representation in tree form with son and father nodes will facilitate the display of the dependency between categories C This will be the root group of the tree When adding new images they are automatically added to this root group On clicking this the group will be added as son to the selected group father Then the name of the group is entered into the new node created c 1 Energy General screens 1 Secondary screens 1 Switch If you then want to change the name of a group select the group and o
13. Filtering events by individual event The latter option will allow us to change the display mode Thus we can enable or disable the total mode Change the display mode by enabling or disabling the total view If you activate the total view we will have a list as follows 286 b Historic events Week 38 15 septiembre 2008 21 septiembre 2008 PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Previous Next v PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Devices Screens Reports lt Graph Table 7 Events Week 38 15 septiembre 2008 21 septiembre 2008 Activated Recognized Disabled Total duration Ocupaci n preocupante 1 1 1 3h 23m 305 Suceso para contar 2488 lt not applied gt 2477 69h 27m 415 Error del CVM Harm nicos 746 lt not applied gt 746 38m 55 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 156 114 156 ph 12m 15 el primer evento 192 142 192 3m 165 o Back Next Goto f Grouped by i Group Event 3 Add up Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Table of logged events total mode In this way the table consists of five columns one less than in the previous and as many rows as events defined in the environment The first column indicates the name of the event the second the number of times it has been enabled in the period to which the data relates indicated in the title the third column indicates how man
14. FICOU I Gs ok TE 295 pd ed EE 296 Luo A E E ENTE 298 J4 0 MUN scelestus ee em atas tac Secus 300 O 301 Nr 301 EA PUS ATA OUIDULY e tod n aie uen Me eRe ia Ud 302 14 1 10 te dut pt es 302 14 1 11 Ede Ice VAT DID S t tene tek o Le eese a tone kde 303 REL NE Co wot cr ETE 303 Pc 303 HLI 2 S 304 URS CIRWA mmn 304 I4 llb5 CVM E Lose d atum d at ade e ffo 305 SACO NR MUN M 305 IMPERAT 305 INA MEG c 306 JE RO 307 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada TO RRM Craen 307 14 1 12 Graph variables and special Tablesaus caa tee Ee oae a d D eheu aso IN e RS 306 14 1 13 DIGIUS Of Itm uM IMEEM 308 14 1 14 Eveni OS T 309 4 2 XPRESSIONS AND CONDITIONS E 310 14 2 1 Wizard for the Creation of Expressions and 312 ps
15. p POWERNET X J X 3 259p J X j Absolute minimum Frequency All registers Valid registers lower percentile 596 Frequency All registers Valid registers Upper percentile 95 Frequency All registers Valid registers EN Absolute maximum Frequency All registers Valid registers HZMAXT HZMAXV X XK OK OK X OK OK OK OK lt 295 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 4 Power Apparent power consumed Instantaneous Minimum 2 3 VAMX VAMN2 VAMN3 VAMN x X SE BENE HERE OX o qe xe ST XE X RAIL X X X X X X X X X X MM ME uL EN TEN Xx E NN m UNAM POWERNET DT EET EMEN ES Apparent power generated QNA Instantaneous Minimum 2 CIRWATT CVM 144 CVM 96 CVM B BD CVM BC CVM K CVM K2 CVM MINI CVM NRG 96 CVM SP LCD POWERNET x x x qno n x x X X X X X X nil eee p ES WEGE ee X C aA NEAL ERE epe eee tr XX XX Ac
16. Displaying a C 14D with images representing digital output status alarm status etc 245 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Similarly other mores specific ways to represent the information can be found such as the QNA phasor diagram QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous Next g Devices Screens Reports 2e Graph Table gt Events Properties Print QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER 9 19 08 12 58 20 PM L1 12 L3 111 L1 L3 Il Voltage Consumed power Phase neutral V 233 95 234 81 234 39 Active KW 110 9 Capacitive kvarC 4 9 Neutral voltage V Inductive kvarL 0 0 Total distortion 96 A t KVA pparen Frequency Hz Power factor Current Generated power Current A 475 6 Active KW Capacitive kvarC Neutral current A Inductive kvarL Apparent Total distortion 96 Power factor Eventos Fasores Interruption 119 98 239 95 Sag MAE 0 56 0 16 Overvoltage Energy Active KWh 1 587 991 666 522 Capacitive kvarCh 184 655 662 160 Inductive kvarLh 21 279 941 403 Graph Entradas digitales Harmonics Wave form Events history Events duration O Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 m QNA Screen display with the phasor diagram Another noteworthy device display screen is that which corresponds to the IP camera This screen displays the camera image which is updating in real time speed of updating depends as
17. This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CVMK HAR configuration Device Information Transformation ratio Peripheral number Primary Secundary Identifier Version K Armonicos 205 Voltage Description Current Armonicas Distortion calculation Alarms Maximum Delay THD Effective value weal oltage alarm fundamental Current alarm x Cancel Device Informatian Peripheral number Model Identifier Version K Armonicos r205 Description K Armanicas Shows general information Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage i Current n i 5 e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The value of the voltage primary should be between 1 and 999999 V and the secondary between 1 and 999 V The product between the primary value and the primary current must be the same or less than 20 000 000 e Primary of the current transformer This is the primary current value of the device It can be between 1 and 10000 A The secondary current is 5A on the CVM K HAR Distortion calculation THD Effective value
18. or disabled It also lets us set up the initial screen when the application is displayed through the Java Client See chapter 12 Access through PowerStudio Client 2 2 12 1 Updates In cases where you have a version of the software and want to upgrade or expand this limitation updates should be from the USB key Clicking on the Updates button in the Preferences dialogue the following window will appear PowerStudio 5cada Updating code 1740475424 Generate File Updating File d Search Cancel update follow these steps 1 Click on the Generate file button This button generates a file with the information necessary to ensure the update Once the file has been generated the following message will appear PowerStudio 5cada 1 The has been generated corrently an Ci PowerStudiol1 740475424 czw Informing where the file with the c2v extension containing software information has been generated 2 Send the file produced in the previous step to its usual distributor so you can create the updated file You should wait for your distributor to send you the updated file with the v2c extension to continue 3 Once your distributor has sent the updated file click on the Search button to select the file PowerStudio 5cada Updating cade 1740475424 Generate File Updating File C HaspUpdate 1740475424 v2c 91 Search git Update x Cancel In
19. 8 gt Devices status 1 MAIN REGULATOR iL QuALITY NETWORK _ SUB ELECTRICAL PANELS gt _ AIRCONDITIONING AIR CONDITIONING 1 AIR CONDITIONING 2 TEMPERATURES gt j DININGROOM iL VIRTUAL LIGHTING 9 SUB PANEL AIR CONDITIONING MAIN 2 OFFICES iJ satuPs WAREHOUSE WORKSHOP Devices Menu e Events Allows access to both the logged view of events and the active events window A Active events Events Menu e Status of devices Gives access to the view of the device status Finally the General menu consists of the following options Toolbar Statusbar Allarm if it doesn t communicate Events actions Gs Connect k Logout Language 2 Look and feel i About General Menu e Toolbar Lets the toolbar be shown or hidden e Status bar Lets the status bar be shown or hidden Alarm if it doesn t communicate Allows you to set whether an alarm should sound when there is a server or not e Events actions Lets us decide which types of actions associated with the events we would like to run on the client and which not e Connect Connects with another server changing the IP address and or the port e Logout Allows the current session to be closed Only available when the user has connected to a server that requires authentication e Language Changes the language of the client application e Look and feel Lets
20. Capacitive kvarC 0 0 0 0 0 0 Inductive kvarL 0 0 0 0 0 0 Apparent KVA 0 0 0 0 0 0 Power factor Total distortion 96 Cosine Phi Frequency Hz 50 0 Maximum demand Phase phase V 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current Maximum demand KW Current A Neutral current A ANE nalog inputs Analog input 1 Total distortion 96 Analog input 2 Energy Analog input 3 Active kWh Digital outputs Capacitive kvarCh Digital output 1 Closed Inductive kvarLh Digital output 2 Opened Maximum minimum reset E Q Server 192 168 5 52 8080 aM As can seen on the previous screen the values of the different variables are organized both in tabs in graphs tables rows and or columns for easier localisation Similarly some of the variables selected can be seen marked by white letters on a blue background Another common element among the different overviews of the devices is that limits can be set on the variables values so that they can be marked with one colour or another depending on the interval 242 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada b CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Oo Previous Next F Devices al Screens Reports 24 Graph Table Events dm Properties Print CVM1 44 Izquierda 9 19 08 12 43 21 PM Voltage Power Active Phase neutral Capacitive kvarC Inductive Apparent kVA Power factor Cosine Phi Phase phase V Total d
21. K E ONERE Eo uccide CWMNRG906 X j S X j CVM K2 14 1 5 Energies Apparent energy Consumed um Tariff y 1 9 Lx Tariff y y 1 9 NVAETy CVM K2 SS _ CVM MINI CO CVMNRG96 X Jj X Active energy Consumed Tariff y OE x 1 3 TRECE tyr CIRWATT CNN CANIS GONNA HOVWMEBD p m p gp p CVMBC TTX CVMK ToT 0O m j dO n E Je doo pe X X X lt CVM NRG 96 CVM SP MK LCD u POWERNET QNA Active energy generated Contract x x 1 3 Tariff y y 1 9 CIRWATT LX X eon iE ee CVMK O CVM K2 1 MINI DL d WT o dq CVMNRG96 d Og EE EDMK 298 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Capacitive energy consumed 2nd quadrant 2Q III Partial TOME TE x 1 3 A MEGA MUR NAE Total CIRWATT x X x 1 IL a el PEVMBIBEO x o o 1 1 o To LE x o o 1 x
22. started up There are devices with which it has not been possible to establish communication yet and which are unknown Similarly the icon corresponding to the square on the right informs us if there are active events in the application In this case moving the cursor over this icon a message will appear indicating how many events are active at that time There are active events 1 Message indicating that there are 6 events active Both for indicating communication problems with devices and active events double click on the icon in question to inspect the view associated with more detail In the first case we will go to the 227 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada view of the device status and in the second case the window where events will appear Both the view of the status of the devices and the active events window will be discussed later in fuller detail N B The status bar can be hidden by the corresponding option in the client application menu specifically on the General option Similarly it is possible to avoid it appearing with the option Enable menu and toolbar option in the Preferences Engine editor option In the latter case it will not be possible to make it appear again from the client application 12 2 2 Menu Bar The menu bar located at the top provides access to all features available on the client This bar has three main menus Options Views and General The Options menu consists of the
23. Modify event Mame Voltage section 24 General Advanced Motor s actions Client s actions Condition The value of the variable cannot be read Furnace 1 11 gt 240 i condition for deactivation Deactivation condition The value of the variable cannot be read Furnace 1 11 lt 220 v Notify trough emerging window Iw Register in Groups Critics 2 Voltages Add oy Delete w Accept Cancel The functions of this dialogue are specified as follows Mame oltage section i Name that uniquely identifies the event in the application General Advanced Mator s actions Client s actions Allows switching to be carried out between different event set up parameters The previous picture shows the general configuration of an event Condition The value of the variable cannot be read ESTEE Condition of the event The event will become enabled when the condition is true and will remain disabled on the contrary This can be entered manually or using the wizard __ button see appendix 14 2 1 Wizard for the creation of expressions and conditions Iw Use condition for deactivation Deactivation condition The value of the variable cannot be read Furnace 1 11 lt 220 A condition for deactivation of the event can be added by checking not this box this will indicate whether we want to use prerequisite for disablin
24. 110 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 20 1 2 4 SD Memory If the device has an SD Memory expansion memory but the SD memory is not inserted the data measured is not stored on the memory or by the software CVMk configuration Expansion card 5D memory information on 5D memory Status SD ok Size 240 MB L3 Format 50 Free space 96 13 Register variables Selected variables 372 amp Select variables Cancel On the upper part of the dialogue information is shown about the SD Memory inserted into the device It shows information such as the status with which it is possible to know if the card works correctly or if there are any problems as for example if it is protected from overwriting the size of the Format 50 card and the remaining free space It is also possible by Clicking the button to format the SD card It should be borne in mind that if the card is formatted it will lose all data not downloaded by means of the software The number of variables that the device saves in the log is shown on the lower part Clicking amp Select variables the the variables that the device will save can be selected PETAT MR TRIER General Power Maximum demand Energy Voltage harmonics Current harmonics Instantaneous Masimums All as yw i Fhase phase voltage Neutral voltage Distortion in voltage Distortion in neutral tension Frequency
25. 2 2 12 Preferences This option can be used to configure a series of general parameters for the application Preferences General Editing password ASS setup Activate Active events R55 Language English Password Server URL Web server Port anan Repeat password Number of ASS items Save system s event Authentification Client application Configurate mail server EE DE Activate user authentification nable menu and toolbar git Updates Start screen None Language English El Using this selector the application language can be selected Web server Port 8080 The option of using application as a Web server we can use internet browser to display the measurement parameters for the devices connected to the local PC see Chapter 12 Save system sevent Will indicate to the software if an events log should be saved or not If it is decided to keep the system events a table with the various activities taking place in the system can be seen such as when a user accesses a SCADA screen or is denied access O Configuate mai sever Allows the mail server to be configured to make it possible to send e mails during events see section 10 3 2 3 Send mail 26 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Configurate mail server Mail address Mail server address SMTP W The mail server SMTP requires identification User name Password Repeat password Where t
26. 3 37 2 Displaying values 1 2 3 Digital inputs input Closed Digit input 18 Closed _ Digital input 35 Opened O Digital input 2 2 O Digital input 19 Closed Q Digital input 36 Opened O Digital input 3 Closed Digital input 20 Closed Digital input 37 Opened Digital input 4 Closed Digital input 21 Closed Digital input 38 Opened Digital input 5 Closed Digital input 22 Closed _ Digital input 39 Opened O Digital input 6 Closed Digital input 23 Closed Digital input 40 Opened O Digital input 7 Closed Digitalinput24 Closed Digital input 41 Opened O Digital input 8 Closed Digitalinput25 Closed Digital input 42 Opened O Digital input 9 Opened Digitalinput26 Opened Digital input 43 Opened Digital input 10 Closed Digital input 27 Opened Digital input 44 Opened Digital input 11 Closed Digital input 28 Opened O Digital input 45 Opened Digital input 12 Closed Digital input 29 Opened 3 Digital input 46 Opened Digital input 13 Closed Digital input 30 Opened O Digital input 47 Opened Digital input 14 Closed O Digital input 31 Opened Digital input 48 Opened Digital input 15 Closed Digital input 32 Opened O Digital input 49 Opened Q Digital input 16 Closed O Digital input 33 Opened O Digital input 50 Opened Digital input 17 Closed O Digital input 34 Opened O Digital input number Specifies the digital input in use Input status Input Open
27. 8 80 Automatically obtain IP address DHCP Part n 0001 x Cancel Where P address Corresponds to the IP address through which we can communicate with the device Subnet Mask Corresponds to the subnet mask used on the network where the device is connected Predetermined Gateway Corresponds to the address of the gateway if the device is not on the same network as the computer containing the program Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP This option will be enabled when we want the device to automatically receive the IP address via a DHCP server Corresponds to the communications port of the device Advanced communication Permits the configuration of a series of additional parameters of the device See section 2 2 1 3 Advanced configuration of devices On adding or modifying the device the software will try to detect it If it is unable to detect it if the device is new or has not been allocated an IP address or has an allocated an IP different to that entered in the Converter Address it will ask if we want to assign a new IP address to the converter PowerStudio 5cada 3 The device TCP2R5 doesn t answer vou want to assign an IP address to Ehe device N It will only be possible to assign an IP address to the device on the same network as the computer running the program If the answer the following dialogue box will appear which will permit an IP ad
28. Active output Wh pulse 0 Variable Active Consumed f Active Generated Configuration of the output relay of the active energy The number of Wh equivalent to an output impulse and the variable that will be measured to give this pulse If the pulse value is 0 the output will be treated like a standard digital output enabling it value to be forced from 0 to 1 Reactive output pulse 0 Variable Inductive Consumed Capacitive Consumed Inductive Generated Capacitive Generated Configuration of the output relay of the active energy The number of VArh equivalent to an output pulse and the variable that will be a measured to give the pulse can be configured If the pulse value is 0 the output will be treated like a standard digital output enabling it value to be forced from 0 to 1 127 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 2 Generic Modbus Due of the variety of devices that communicate with Modbus protocol currently on the market a generic device to enable quick and easy communication with these devices has been created Once the variables to be read have been configured the device will behave in a manner similar to other devices with which the program communicates 3 2 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options GModbus Driver parameters Device parameters xoc Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and
29. LLL LE OWMNRG96 x b CE RR CPOWERNET SS ie pog Capacitive energy generated 2nd quadrant 40 ee LAUR E ete eee NEM LCIRWATT 1 PF X X X XK X CVMBBD x o S T T T T e LOVMBO 18 3 dU LCVMK o JJ Jr hh T 6L och 43 CWMMK2 x o o Jj J LCVMMINL X fo CVMNRG96 x T T T T G mD Jolo o DONE ee es oo Inductive energy consumer quadrant 10 I _ x LL LL X 9 iii 1l IL OWMBC x OMK OMQ X X OWMNRG9S X OWsSP X _ EXE 3 EE ANNE EDMK MK D MKD POWERNET 299 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Inductive energy generated 3 quadrant IH Partial Tou L1 L2 L3 Il Contract x x 1 3 CIRWATT X X X X X CVMBBD Jx o j j j j T Jp bd j P pCVMBC OWMIK r 1 p L Tr CVMK2 Jx J 5 b O CVM MINI up Wm CVMNRG96 EDMK Lo pu qp p dp cgo qo All energy variables can be discriminated 14 1 6 Maximum demand 11 L2 L3 m Tanffy y1 3 L1
30. Setup GF Advanced setup wf Accept J Cancel Where e Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the same name Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device e Converter address Corresponds to the address through which the program can communicate with the device This parameter can be an IP address or a name This direction should not be confused with the MAC address e Corresponds to the converter communications port e Configuration port Corresponds to the communication port through which the program can configure the device This port is 30718 by default Fora TCP2RS device to be able to communicate through a router carry out the following steps 1 In the Converter Address field enter the address of the router 2 In the Port field enter the communications port and redirect this port on the router to the communications port of the device 3 Redirect the configuration port on the router to port 30718 of the converter N b For information on re addressing ports consult the router user manual e Parameters By clicking the button a dialogue will appear where a number of parameters of the device can be configured 71 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device configuration TCP2RS IF address 132 168 111 120 Metmask 255 25 0 D0 Gateway
31. This encoding variable name can be used in formulae graphs and tables although in the case of reports graphs and tables we can display variables saved in value log files On those occasions we wish to discriminate a variable as long as the variable can be discriminated for instance in the case of energy the discriminator information will be added to the basic encoding name discriminator name type time name variable Here the name of the discriminator and the name of the type of hour upon which the variable values will be discriminated are indicated This type of encoding with discriminators may only be used in reports graphs and tables and with variables that have been saved in value log files For a better understanding the variables are displayed in separate tables depending on the type of variable measured by the devices The columns on the left correspond to the type of variable measured whether the variable is instantaneous maximum or minimum the phase to which it corresponds or any other information depending on the variable and finally the code used for example the instantaneous phase neutral voltage of phase 1 will correspond to the code VI1 On the other hand the columns to the right of each table will correspond to devices that can measure each of the variables indicating with an X if the variable will be measured by the device and with an O if the variable will be measured depending on the version of the de
32. e Configuration port Corresponds to the communication port that the program uses to configure communications on the devices e Parameters General communication parameters configuration e Advanced Configuration See 2 2 1 3 Advanced configuration of devices Depending on the device added there may be more or fewer parameters For more information see the section on the corresponding device 14 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 2 1 2 Adding a Second level Device The configuration of second level devices will be easier as communication configuration is not required Second level devices communicate with the programme through the first level devices they are connected to Mame Description ee Peripheral number 1 p Accept Cancel In which e Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the same name Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device e Peripheral Number Number identifying the device in communications Two second level devices connected to the same first level device may not have the same peripheral number 2 2 1 3 Advanced Configuration of Devices On devices with direct connection features such as converters the configuration of certain communication aspects will be possible Below is the configuration dialogue of device RS232 485 showi
33. fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion that the device will calculate can be configured 113 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Alarms hd asinum Delay Voltage alarm 0 Current alarrn 0 Should an additional module with two relay outputs be available it be configured alarm mode with the THD or D variables on voltage and on current 0 Maximum value When value read by the CVM K HAR device exceeds the programmed value the device will close the contact corresponding to the programmed alarm This maximum programmed value will be a of THD or D Delay Delay both on the connection and disconnection of the alarm relay This value will be expressed in seconds 114 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 22 MINI CVM and CVM NRG 96 3 22 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVM NRG96 Driver parameters y step Variable units The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 22 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CVM NRG96 configuration
34. 113 322 MENEC VNLANDE G96 o ath ne al seid 115 Sal DIVET OP ONS S at edet asada i ed ek 115 3 22 1 1 Device parameters aranin etat doe edat status Gase cede 115 K2 S PET 118 OO DEWE OP PUONS ena edad aet eed edat cundi uaa ebd 116 3231 DEVICE parameter S 118 R232 Ahaloguc inputan aA 119 3 23 1 3 D 119 5725 ONNES P ah ce astra sates EUIS 120 4 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Died D 120 3 24 1 1 DEVICE Pat annie EUS 120 55 DE O uud d d d Ed uM D ME aT HIN 123 Dell MOTIVE ODIONS chin 123 3 25 1 1 DPevice oboe arduo fer 123 225 2 e tot dicii OLEI DM LAM Se I di EI UE 125 SUMI PI d ME mr M NT 126 SLO Per OPOS ae TREES 126 3 26 1 1 Devico parameters anre R 126 527 GENERIC MOD BUS ebbe He com AR eat qudd 128 CTO IEEE OU TS 126 fL Device WALANG LOLS eubE iig jose qut E 129 ATI
35. Enables the contracts to be displayed on screen Using these selectors the contracts shown on screen can be selected In this case the driver displays contracts 1 and 3 and will hide contract 2 These parameters will only affect the screen display of the CIRWATT device contracts but not the internal configuration of the CIRWATT device The remaining parameters are explained in section 3 1 1 Driver Parameters 3 2 2 Device parameters This screen will allow a series of internal information and parameters of the device to be displayed on screen Driver configuration CIRWATT Device Informatian Peripheral number Serial number 1 3895607007 Identifier Version CIR WATT 2 5 Description Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage 400 0 400 0 Current 5 0 5 0 x Cancel Device Informatian Peripheral number Serial number 1 395607007 Identifier Version CIR WATT 2 5 Description Shows general information 67 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage 400 0 400 0 Current 5 0 5 0 e Voltage transformation ratio shows the ratio between primary and secondary voltage programmed into the device e Power transformation ratio Shows the ratio between the current primary and secondary programmed into the device 3 7 2 3 Contracted power This screen allows the contracted loads for each contract and tariff of the CIRWATT to be displayed It will always be po
36. lt id gt lt value gt lt value gt lt variable gt lt values gt Where Values Main field which will identify the XML as a response to the request for variable values variable List of variables id Identifier of the variable in the format device variable see 14 1 Variables Value Value of variable at the time of the request 317 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 3 5 services user forceVariables xml id device With this petition we may send the order to force variables to PowerStudio The request must include the name of the device we want to force so that if necessary authentication can be checked see 2 2 12 2 User identification Only the variables belonging to the device indicated in the petition will be forced lt forceVariables gt lt forceVar gt forceName forceName gt lt forceValue gt lt 7 forceValue gt forceVar gt forceVariabies Where e forceVariables Main field that will identify the XML as a petition to force variables e forceVar Information on each of the variables to be forced forceName Name of variable with format device variable 14 1 Variables Only variables that can be forced for example digital output variables forceValue Value to which we wish to force the variable 14 3 6 services user records xml begin end var period 900 Returns information on one or more variables between the
37. CB5 4 configuration Device Information Configure prealarm Peripheral number BU 5 4 Prealarm threshold amp fall Identifier Version CB5 4 1 1 Operating system frequency Description 50Hz 60 Hz Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Description Trigger coil output polarity f Standard f Positive Trigger current A Enable reclosing 0 3 Trigger delay s Instantaneous Accept Cancel Device Information Peripheral number 60 CB5 4 Identifier Version 5 4 1 1 Description 49 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Shows general information about the device Configure prealarm Prealarm threshold 2 70 Pre alarm threshold equipment possesses This can vary between 50 and 100 of the minimum trip threshold of the device channels Operating system frequency 50Hz 60 Hz Enables the frequency of the working network where the device is connected to be selected Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Description Trigger coil output polarity f Standard f Positive Trigger current Enable reclosing 03 Trigger delay s Instantaneous Shows the channel configuration Channel Channel 2 Channel 3 Chamnel4 As it is only possible to display the configuration of one channel at a time click one of the channels and the selected configuration can be displayed Description Alphanumeric ty
38. Current Neutral current Distortion in current Distortion in neutral current Voltage Kd coefficient Voltage coefficient Current Kd coefficient Current Ka coefficient Ponderated flicker Pst Factor ie te B B m le e 5 al 181 5 E x lt E E E Cancel 111 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 21CVM K HAR 3 21 1 Connection with Modbus TCP The CVM K HAR devices can connect on MODBUSTCP connections with some limitations PowerStudio can read the values measured by the device but cannot read the configuration By adding a device on a MODBUSTCP connection see section 3 10 TCP2RS Modbus TCP Converter PowerStudio displays the following warning PowerStudio 5cada ATTENTION The device is trying bo communicate through a Modbus connection Communication is now allowed only For monitoring so remate device configuration is disabled 3 21 2 Driver options The following is the options menu Options adsf Driver parameters Device parameters 5 i HEA 1 Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 112 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 21 2 1 Device parameters is not possible to configure the device when it communicates via the MODBUSTCP connection
39. Current direction rae Q B Variable Inductive Consumed Backlight time Partial energy counter devices Capacitive Consumed Inductive Generated n 0 Seconds Rest t Capacitive Generated Input configuration Operating mode Input 1 Input 2 Mode Mode c nard Digital inputs w Sieli Pulses f State Pulses meters Pulses number Pulses number Reset 199 399 93 383 Zx Cancel 146 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number Model ME D Identifier Version MEd 9 99 Description Shows general information Visualization in the device reactive measure partial counter devices Visualisation on the screen of the device e Omit reactive measurement The reactive measurements are not shown on the device screen although they will be continue to be visualised on the software display screens e Omit partial counters Partial counter measurements are not shown on the screen of the device nor on the display screens of the software Current direction t Up Down Flow direction Backlight time 10 Seconds Configuration of the backlight disconnection The value should oscillate between 0 and 10 seconds Partial energy counter devices EJ Reset On clicking the button all the partial counters of the device will be started Number of quadrants fe 4 Configuration of the number of quadrants With
40. Custom colors r7 r r rrrrmr Hue Red 255 ColorlSolid Lur 120 Blue jo Add to Custom Colors Alignment This will permit us to decide on which of the rectangle defined in report sheet the text will be situated Text e Thetextto be displayed is written here This button will allow us to add as a style the personalised configuration that we have identified for the control of the active text and thus be able to use the style in other controls 7 2 1 3 Image control This tool will allow us to include still pictures into the report Once this tool has been selected it will be necessary to draw a rectangle on the report by keeping the left mouse button pressed The properties than can be configured from this control are Search for image By selecting this option an image from image manager can selected see section 2 2 6 Image manager to select an image to assign to the control shown in the report Image selection Select the image to be used EG fl Energy 4 1 General Screen 1 Switches LINIFIL2 UNIFILS Accept Cancel O Reeves Click on this button to delete the present background image 183 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada v Maintain aspectratio f enabled this option will maintain the width and height proportions o
41. LM 24 limits setup Inputs from 1 te 12 Inputs from 13 to 24 Pre alarm Pre alarm Alarm Nominal Alarm y ee pop ppp SS Se SS Ss ff SS 1 ESS eee EE eee EE wp eee ss es ee Ss pe pe joco DSSS CSS e SSS pi ps9 pr pem cnp pe m ES Minimum Maximum Accept l Only limits can be defined for flows that are enabled By means of this dialogue the nominal value of flow type counters as well as a series of margins to display on screen when a variable measures unusual values can be configured The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 136 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 29 LMAI 4O M 3 29 1 Driver options The LMAI AO M options can be accessed from See Menu See section 2 4 3 Display options e Toolbar See section 2 4 4 Toolbar The following is the options menu Options LM4 Driver parameters Device parameters 1111 Device inputs TE Variable units Variable limits 3 29 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC LM 4
42. Min This box indicates the minimum value to control Delay Alarm delay in seconds The maximum value is 9999 seconds 94 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 19CVM K 3 19 1 Connection with Modbus TCP The CVM K devices can connect on MODBUSTCP connections with some limitations PowerStudio can read the values measured by the device but cannot read the configuration Although it is not possible to read the configuration for the correct visualisation of values PowerStudio needs to ascertain certain information about the device This information should be entered by the user and it will be the responsibility of the user to ensure that the data corresponds to the device connected If this data introduced by the user is incorrect this can give communication errors making it impossible for PowerStudio to show the values measured by the device On adding a device to the MODBUSTCP connection see section 3 10 PowerStudio will show the following warning message PowerStudio Scada ATTENTION The device is trying to communicate through Modbus connection Communication is now allowed only For monitoring sa remote device configuration is disabled For correct communication with the device is necessary select some additional parameters wich cannot be read by the software in the Following screen Accept Then a dialogue box will appear with the information the PowerStudio needs to communicate with the device CVM
43. Operating mode As can be observed in the figure the option New will appear which will enable a new report to be created followed by the name of the reports that have been created until the present if there are any Clicking the right hand mouse button on any of the already existing reports will offer the possibility of modifying names and eliminating reports Modif Report 2 adi Beo Delete repart In the case of selecting the New option a window will appear where the name of the new report to be created can be chosen Mew report pe If we select New or directly some of the already existing reports a report design window will open 179 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 2 Report design window For editing reports the editing working mode must be used see section 2 2 12 Operating mode The report design window looks like this LLL The window is divided into three areas e Tools 1 e Information panel 2 e Report sheet 3 The tools allow the report design to be configured more easily The information panel enables us to access all the configuration options of a control which is added to the report design and is selected at this time The report sheet is the report design view Therefore through the tools 1 controls can be entered in the report sheet 3 whose properties can be configured in the information panel 2 When a new report is being created th
44. PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage 2 no Current 5 e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The product value between primary value and primary current has to be equal or less than 20 000 000 The primary value depending on the fullscale must be between 1 and the corresponding value of the following table Fullscale background Maximum value e Current transformation ratio This is the primary current value the device has The value can be between 1 and 10 000 A The secondary current is 5A in the CVM 144 Analog outputs Fullscale 1 voltage L1 229 232 0 20 2 Reactive power L1 125 323 4 20m 3 Current L3 5 9 D 20m 4 Active power L1 kw 323 0 20 4 4 This section shows the configuration of the analogue outputs of the device and the option is given to configure them with the desired values e Variable Permits any parameter measured by the CVM 144 to be selected except parameters corresponding to energy e Zero Value of the parameter to which the zero of the scale is assigned Fullscale Value of the parameter to which the maximum value of the scale is assigned Type Output type allows outputs 0 20 mA 4 20 mA or 0 10 V to be chosen depending on the device Analog inputs Fullscale Decimal
45. SERVIGES ame ama LL 315 43d Services 7 COVICES QUT n 315 143 2 Seryices user devicelnfoximl 1d 1 ii ue de n erdt uro 315 14 3 3 services user varInfo xml var device variable id device noonoo 316 14 3 4 services user values xml var device variable id 4 2 317 14 3 5 services user force Variables xml id device sees 316 14 3 6 services user records xml begin end lt var period 900 316 BAQ audi er TORUS NN Md Ne LI ERE 32 14 4 1 None of the equipment communicates What is happening eee 321 1442 ATCP2RS converter does not communicate What is happening ssec 321 14 4 5 Ican not see the applet What is happening esses eene eene enne 321 14 4 4 The Applet does not display the texts properly What is happening cessere 321 14 4 5 The values display is not what I expected What is happening eese 321 14 4 6 An event is not behaving as I expected What is 322 14 4 7 Ican t paint the graph correctly What is happening esses eene nnn 922 14 4 8 The Paint Pot is not working correctly What is happening cesses 022 14 4 9 Can I lau
46. _4 the following dialogue will appear Help for the event s creation What da you want to add Event condition Event deactivation condition t Delay in activating the event Delay in deactivating the event Disabled according to Text linked ta the event t Mame of ane of the groups linked ta the event Yalue of ane of the event arguments Character The value is Accept Cancel Where you can choose what kind of parameter to be added to the annotation 216 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 3 1 1 Arguments For the creation of the annotation a series of arguments can be defined Each argument will consist of a formula and representation format of the value of the formula as can be seen in the following dialogue New argument Formula Empty cell Numerical format Integers Decimals Automatic 3 r Zeros on the right Thousand separator Accept Cancel Both the formula and the numerical format were previously described in 7 2 1 5 Formula control When the event is enabled if the argument is used to create the annotation the programme will evaluate the formula and will represent it in accordance with the configured format 217 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 3 2 Actions For each event it will be possible to define a series of actions to be taken in each event status It will be possible to formulate actions both i
47. e Advanced communication Permits the configuration of a series of additional parameters of the device See section 2 2 1 3 Advanced configuration of devices On adding or modifying the device the software will try to detect it If it is unable to detect it if the device is new or has not been allocated an IP address or has an allocated IP different to that entered in the Converter Address it will ask if you want to assign a new IP address to the converter PowerStudio 5cada 3 The device TCP2R5 MadbusTCP doesn t answer Do vou want to assign an IP address to the device AN It will only be possible to assign an IP address to the device if is on the same network as the computer running the program If the answer is yes the following dialogue box will appear which will permit an IP address to be assigned to the device 19 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device configuration TCP2R5 Modbus E Physical address MAC IP address 132 166 1 161 Physical address MAC Ethernet address written an the device label unique and different Far every system device tis a number like 00 20 44 61 05 19 Accept Cancel Where e Physical address MAC Ethernet address that each device has which is unique and distinct on all network devices The hardware addresses which network interfaces possess this will be type 00 20 4A 61 05 19 IP address IP Address to be allocated to the device tha
48. 28 septiembre 2008 Annotation Next v Name Properties Recognized in Desactivated in lunes 22 00 00 00 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 81 28 95 12 05 lunes 22 00 06 35 el primer evento Se cumpli la condicion trunc rand 3000 1 3000 8h 21m 34s 1s lunes 22 00 44 01 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS Il 1 amp amp secondo lt 5 not applied gt 15 lunes 22 00 48 00 Error del Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 1s lunes 22 00 53 02 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 135 lunes 22 01 00 00 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 28m 95 2m 05 lunes 22 01 00 18 el primer evento Se cumpli la condicion trunc rand 3000 1 3000 7h27m 51s 1s lunes 22 01 32 03 Error del CVM Harm nicos KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 1s lunes 22 01 44 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS l 1 amp amp secondo lt 5 not applied gt 55 lunes 22 01 45 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 15 lunes 22 01 52 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM Armonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 1s
49. 604 Identifier Version MK 1 07 w Reset Description Alarm Variable Maximum Miniman Delay Voltage v 300 200 0 a Cancel Device Informatian Peripheral number Model 25 ME LCD D 604 Identifier Version ME 1 07 Description Shows general information 149 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Partial energy meter 4 Reset By clicking the button the partial power counter will be set to zero Alarm Variable Maximum Miniman Delay Voltage v 300 200 0 This section shows the configuration of the device relay output and the option to configure it with the desired values is given Variable The parameters associated with the relay are indicated in this field The output is programmed as an alarm and any of the parameters measured by the device can be controlled The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are indicated in brackets Max In this box the maximum value to control is indicated Min In this box the minimum value to control is indicated Delay Alarm delay in seconds The maximum value is 9999 seconds 150 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 33 POWERNET 3 33 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options PowerNet Driver parameters y step Variable units 3 33 1 1 Device parameters Device parameters Variable limits This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured
50. Channel 1 Alphanumeric type information where a brief description of the channel can be entered to for easy identification Type of toroid 30 mA WG WGS Toroid type connected to the channel There are three possible options for selection Channel disabled e Fullscale channel with 6A 30mA 6A e Fullscale with 60A 300mA 60A Trip threshald 5 005 Channel trigger threshold depending on the type of toroid connected the values available will be Toroid 30 mA 6 A Toroid 300 mA 60A 300 mA 5A _ Customised Customised 0 Only if the value of the customised trigger threshold does not exceed 6A 300mA 1A Delay time Instantaneous 2 Channel delay time the possible values are Customised O of relay output t Normally open Channel output relay operating mode Number of reclosures Number of attempts at reclosure After this number the relay will be latched Time between reclosing s Time between reclosures of time between reclosing Marmal Exponential Operating mode in the time between reclosures 57 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 5 2 Displaying values The CBS 8 device will show the following value screen Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 OFF 98
51. Device Information Peripheral number 13 C M NAGS6 Identifier Version CYM NA GSE 1 03 Description Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage Current Voltage Single phase neutral t Compound between phases Distortion calculation t THO Effective value D fundamental Alarm Variable Maximum Voltage L1 vj 0 Device parameters Variable limits Password Enable password Password E Repeat password Masmeter Feriod Window type 1 5 Fixed Unit Active power 4 Maximeter reset Backlight time 0 Seconds Energy counters Reset Miniman Delay Accept Cancel 115 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Informatian Peripheral number 13 Identifier CVM NAGSE Description Shows general information Model Version 1 03 Password Enable password Password Repeat password Allows us to enable or disable the password to block the configuration using the device keyboard Transformation ratio Voltage Current Primary Secundary Depending on the version connected programming of the voltage transformation ratio can be disabled Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The product between the primary value and primary current has to be equal or less than 20 000 000 The value of the primary depending on the fullsca
52. For example if we have defined a discriminator with the name Tariff that contains two types of hours H1 and H2 we can refer to both as follows Iarzfa XDCIGHI GVMK XAE Tarifa XDCIQH2 CVMK It should be emphasized that after the name of the tariff we should always find the XDCT extensions followed by the name of the type of hour and the symbol Remember that not all variables of the devices can be discriminated against see the variables code appendix for details on which variables of each device can be discriminated In some parts of the programme such as in the reports and the SCADA screens we can also refer to variables previously defined in the formula list Both in the reports and in the SCADA screens we have a list of expressions each identified by a text that can be used in controlling formulas or in the conditional control So if we have defined an expression and we have given the identifier F1 we can use it in other expressions Raw Deu l sSqgre 311 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada should be emphasized that the identifier of an expression name of the variable can not start with a numerical digit although they may be contained in it Finally in those places where a condition is required it will be possible to use the operators less than lt greater than gt less than or equal to lt greater than or equal to gt lt equal to different to
53. IEC 870 5 102 protocol To enable downloading when new equipment is added the Download files 870 5 102 option must be selected and the gateway the measuring point address and password configured Modify CIRWATT Ethernet Mame CIRWATT Description Peripheral number 1 W Descargar ficheros IEC 870 5 102 Link address 1 Measure point address 1 Access key 1 Time zone GMT 01 00 Bruselas Copenhague Madrid Paris IF address 192 168 1 213 Port Configuration port 10001 30718 ey Setup c Advanced setup Accept Cancel From this screen it is possible to configure the time zone where the CIRWATT is located by default the time zone of the software will appear but this should be modified if a new device is found in a different time zone 3 7 2 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CIRWATT Driver parameters Device parameters Hep E Variable units Variable limits Contracted powers The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in 3 1 2 Variable Units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 66 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 2 1 Driver Parameters CIRWATT configuration Representation Analog Text Display contract 1 2 Database Capture period min rA W Save data in directory as default Default discriminator E None gt Display contract 1 3
54. Input Closed Input status Open Closed 164 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 4 Variable selection Where necessary the selection of one or more variables of a device the dialogue for variable selection will appear It will be possible to select both analogue variables voltage current power etc aS well digital variables on equipment which permits this First the selection of analogue variables will be detailed This dialogue will depend on the device connected the explanation corresponding to CVM 96 can be used for this section Select variables v i wg arables inii Harmonics Instantaneous Masgimums Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Current Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Inductive power Apparent power Power Factor Cosine phi Maximum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy Discriminated variable cap ball d pe EE EEE eel al cal en Es M M NM ESQ ip E _ Ww m M ON m M M B i D Where the variables we wish to select can be checked If any variable is already selected it will appear marked as be unchecked discriminator has been already selected either by default or otherwise the variables which can be discriminated will appear marked on the button stveerew and an exp
55. Inputs from 11 to 20 Inputs from 27 to 30 Inputs from 31 to 40 Inputs from 41 to 50 Description Upit Factor Time min Calculation window s Pf ee Jv w MEE ESSE ____ Hh 71 Ee S SSS Accept Cancel x m rJ m NM NM I Checking the selector will activate the flow variable Remember that if this selector is not checked it will not be possible to display the flow value of the corresponding LM50 TCP input Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the flow to be entered for better identification Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units where the flow is shown to be entered Factor Multiplicative value of each input pulse Time Time in minutes for calculating the flow value Calculation window Time window in seconds that the software will use to calculate an estimate of the flow taking into account the value of the device counter 144 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 30 1 3 Variable limits LM50 TCP limits setup Inputs from 1 ta 10 Inputs from 11 to 20 Inputs from 21 to 30 Inputs from 31 to 40 Inputs from 41 to 50 Pre alarm Pre alarm Alarm Nominal Alarm _ ee SSS ESS ESS ee eee ESS SSS CESS ESS J y pug Ei gr E EE e rn
56. LM 24 M Identifier Version 24 19 Description Shows general information Meters NM NH E NN NM o E __ NN ND 4h 13s sio wo vpn abo 60 n o ezn Iw Load values in device meters This part of the configuration corresponds to the device counters If the selector is checked on sending the configuration the energy counter will be loaded with the values entered into the corresponding boxes 3 28 1 2 Device inputs For each of the inputs of the LM 24 M three variables will be available a digital display to show the status of the input open closed a counter variable to show the number of pulses detected at the input and finally a flow variable calculated by the software as an estimate of the pulse frequency on the input during a space of time By means of this dialogue LM 24 M inputs can be configured Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Flow Inputs from 1 te 12 Inputs from 13 to 24 Description Meters By mean of the Distal the display configuration of different types of variables can be configured The previous image shows the configuration of the counters 134 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Where e Description Alphanumeric type which permits a brief description of the counter so it can be identified better e Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief descr
57. On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC POWERNET configuration Device Information Peripheral number 1 POW ERNE T Version 1 00 Identifier Powerklet Description Distortion calculation t THO Effective value D fundamental Energy counters Reset Zx Cancel Device Information Peripheral number Model 1 POW ERNE T Identifier Version PowerMet 1 00 Description Shows general information 151 I asimeter Period Window type n 5 Fixed Unit Active power Zx M aximeter reset PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Distortion calculation THO Effective value D fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion that the device will calculate can be configured Period Window type 5 Fixed Active power x M aximeter reset Period 15 the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes Type of window Type of window used to save the maximeter value it can be fixed or sliding Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power lll apparent power Ill current or current by phase depending on the device Maximeter reset When the button is enabled
58. P1 Control Formula The formula defined is incorrect not allowed P F1 Control Formula The formula defined is incorrect Variable not allowed P1 Control formula The formula defined is incorrect Variable not allowed F1 Control Formula The formula defined is incorrect Variable not allowed P1 Control formula The formula defined is incorrect Variable not allowed F1 Control Formula The formula defined is incorrect Variable not allowed The list below shows the different errors found The error information consists of the type of resource name of the resource and a brief explanation of the error found The different types of resources are SCADA Screens Reports Events When you double click the left mouse button on an error line the program will automatically display the SCADA screen report or event where the mistake was found and if it is a SCADA screen control it will select the control where that error has been detected 204 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 Events The program will only show events when it is in the run mode the edit mode is when you can add change or delete the different events that will be useful to warn of potential hazardous or exceptional states in the facility The events may be notified In this case the events will be shown by means of a pop up screen when enabled and remain on screen until they have been recognised and disabled In addition for each event an in
59. PowerStudio Scada Mame Jwinterday 00000 Alphanumeric type data which uniquely identifies the type of day within the discriminator Colour that visually identifies the type of day within the tariff Click once with the left mouse button on the coloured box 1 the following dialogue appears where we can configure the colour for the type of day 11 11 mE Hue 20 Red 255 Sat 240 Green 128 Define Custom Colors gt gt Colors olid Lum 120 Blue 0 Add to Custom Colors dh Add Modiy cj Delete Time zones that configure the type of day These zones should occupy the entire 24 hour period but not overlap In practice different sections within one day indicate that energy is billed differently in each one depending on the time of day in question Representation Graphs of time zones This gives us visual guidance on how we are defining such a day enabling us to see at a glimpse among other things if any time zone throughout the day needs to be confirmed By adding or modifying a zone the following dialogue will appear 172 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Modify slot Hour type m Peak Add From To 18 zal 22 ad ad Representation 0 Accept Cancel Hour type iT This corresponds to the type of hour within the slot These types of hours will be those configured in section 5 1 1 Types of hours Using this button new types
60. SSS gu p EE EL i Minimum hd asinum f Accept Cancel Limits can only be defined on flow type counters By means of this dialogue the nominal value of flow type counters as well as a series of margins to display on screen when a variable measures unusual values will be configured The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 145 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 31 3 31 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options MKd TR Driver parameters Device parameters y step Variable units The option Variable units is detailed in section 3 1 2 Variable units 3 31 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC Mk D configuration Device Information Number of quadrants Peripheral number 1 Identifier Version MEd 9 99 Wh pulse Description 0 Active Consumed Active output Visualization in the device Active Generated reactive measure Reactive output pulse 0 partial counter devices
61. Screens Will show the different SCADA screens which configure the application See section 2 2 8 Screens Visualise Enables the chosen screen to be visualised Force Variables Permits variables to be forced using the force variable controls on the SCADA screens gt Reports Shows the defined reports See section 2 2 7 gt Events Will display the various events resources see section 2 2 1 1 Events that can be added to a profile 31 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Run event actions on client application Will enable programmed actions to be carried out on the client application when enabled acknowledged disabled or while events are being produced Recognise notified events Allows a notified event to be acknowledged Visualisation of active events Allows active events to be displayed or not Visualisation of notified events Allows events which need to be notified to be displayed or not Visualises event variables Allows graphs and tables of the variables generated by the events to be displayed see section 10 4 Event variables Display event browser Enables the list of events stored on file notified or not to be seen gt Calculated Variables Allows graphs and tables of the calculated variables configured on the software to be displayed see section 2 2 4 Calculated variables gt Others Allows the table with the events of the system to be displayed 2 2 12 2 2 Users Setup auth
62. Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 9 23 08 10 30 57 AM Request to force variables sent Graph with all the display areas with different X axis 258 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 8 3 Tooltip mode The Tooltip mode allows us to see the values of the variables located closest to the cursor with respect to the X axis These values are updated instantly as you move the mouse cursor When we are in this mode the cursor looks like a hand Cursor indicating that we are in the Tooltip mode The mode behaves in such a way as to show the values closest to the mouse position with respect to the X axis of all the areas that share the same X axis Graph CVM144 Izquierda 2 PowerStudio Scada gU Options Views General o Previous v Events er Properties Print e CVM144 Izquierda K 2 CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L1 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L2 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L3 V QU M TED a 17 2008 2 00 144 Izquierda Voltage L1 227 2 CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L2 227 2 V 144 Izquierda Voltage 13 227 2 V EN 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 T E CVM K 2 Active energy T1 689 1 kWh Sep 17 2008 2 00 PM CVM K 2 Active energy T1 141 CVM144 Izquierda V THD d L1 96 CVM1 44 Izquierda V THD d L2 96 17 2008 2 00 i CVM144 Izquierda V THD d L1 1 2 CVM144 Izquierda V THD d L2
63. The system automatically chooses the representation period and the grouping of data which can obviously be changed later Later we shall explain what the two concepts mean and how they can be changed It should be noted that the grouping chosen is a week and the period is typically 30 minutes If the graph we are accessing comes from graph control on a SCADA screen both the grouping and the period are determined in the control and need not be predetermined by default However as always both properties can be modified in the graph view later Similarly certain types of representations are chosen by default line bars etc as well as a few colours and a distribution of the variables in axes and areas depending on the variables represented All these characteristics can be modified later at will A description of what they mean and how they are modified will be explained later 251 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada rm bd Options Views General Previous v Devices Screens E Reports PS Graph Table Events Properties Print gt CVM144 Izquierda Voltage L1 V 15 Sep 2008 o Back o Next 12 Goto f Grouped by 4 Period Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 9 23 08 10 30 57 AM Request to force variables sent Ay Graph of a standard variable without discrimination As can be seen a typical graph consists of a series of common characteristics e Title Situated on the u
64. Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 128 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 27 1 1 Device parameters This screen is used to configure the variables that should be requested from the device The variables are in two groups numeric variables voltages currents counters etc and binary variables typically digital inputs and outputs Generic MODBUS configuration Device Information Identifier Description GModbus variables Registers Description Address Registers Format Units Agrupation criteria Save dp Add Binary variables Address M ame Description Address Type dp Add Import configuration Export configuration Accept Cancel Device Information Identifier Description GModbus General information on the device Mumeric variables Registers Description Address Registers Format Units Agrupation criteria Save dp Add 2 variables of the device See section 3 27 1 1 1 Numeric variables Configuration of the numeric Binary variables Address M ame Description Address Type dp Add t variables of the device See section 3 27 1 1 2 Digital variables Configuration of the binary 129 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada z Import canfiquratian
65. Voltage 1 i 1 Current Configuration of the transformation ratio of the device e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The product between the primary value and the primary current must be the same as or less than 20 000 000 The primary value must be between 1 and 999 999 V while the secondary can be between 1 and 999 V e Current transformation ratio This is the primary and secondary current value the device has The primary can value between 1 and 9999 A and the secondary between 1 or 5A Visualization in the device reactive measure partial counter devices Visualisation on the screen of the device e Omit reactive measurement The reactive measurements are not shown on the device screen although they will continue to be visualised on the software display screens e Omit partial counters Partial counter measurements are not shown on the screen of the device nor on the display screens of the software Backlight time 0 Seconds Configuration of the backlight disconnection The value should oscillate between 0 and 10 seconds Partial energy counter devices Reset On clicking the button all the partial counters of the device will be started Number of quadrants i i Configuration of the number of quadrants With only 2 quadrants the consumed energy counters will be taken into consideration and with 4 the consumed and generated energy counters
66. equipment a brief description of the units can be entered on the input screen 3 25 1 2 Inputs Measured variable Decimal number without decimals t 1 decimal f 2 decimals 3 decimals Only for DH 96 AC DH 96 CT DH DC 96 DH 96 WG units The number of decimal places used when displaying the variable measured on the equipment can be configured This parameter will be used solely as information on your computer and at no time will it be sent or read by the equipment Voltage Decimal number Without decimals 1 decimal Only for DH 96 CPM units The number of decimals with which the voltage on the equipment is displayed can be configured This parameter will be used solely as information on your computer and at no time will it be sent or read by the equipment Current Decimal number C without decimals f 1 decimal f 2 decimals 3 decimals Only for DH 96 CPM units The number of decimals with which the current on the equipment is displayed can be configured This parameter will be used solely as information on your computer and at no time will it be sent or read by the equipment 124 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 25 1 2 Inputs Only for DH 96 CT devices Input configuration Meter Description Upit Meter input pulse 1 Flows Description Upit Factor Flow input lh Time min Calculation window s v Enable flow variable Bn 3 Accept 3 Cancel This screen lets the
67. step Variable units The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 26 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC configuration Device Informatian Peripheral number 25 ED Mk Identifier Version EDM 1 01 Description Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage Current Visualization in the device reactive measure partial counter devices Backlight time Partial energy counter devices 0 Seconds Reset i pou E 1 Device parameters Number of quadrants Active output Wh pulse 0 Variable Active Consumed Active Generated Reactive output pulse ae Variable f Inductive Consumed f Capacitive Consumed Inductive Generated f Capacitive Generated x Cancel Device Infarmatian Peripheral number 25 Identifier Version ED Mk 1 01 Description Shows general information 126 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Transformation ratio Primary Secundary
68. 00 00 00 229 230 6 97 1 lunes 22 00 30 00 231 0 lunes 22 01 00 00 lunes 22 01 30 00 lunes 22 02 00 00 unes 22 07 00 00 unes 22 07 30 00 unes 22 08 00 00 unes 22 08 30 00 unes 22 09 00 00 unes 22 09 30 00 unes 22 10 00 00 lunes 22 10 30 00 lunes 22 11 00 00 lunes 22 11 30 00 lunes 22 12 00 00 lunes 22 12 30 00 1232 3 lunes 22 13 00 00 1233 0 lunes 22 13 30 00 1232 1 lunes 22 14 00 00 231 2 lunes 22 14 30 00 230 8 lunes 22 15 00 00 231 6 lunes 22 15 30 00 232 4 lunes 22 16 00 00 232 5 lunes 22 16 30 00 1232 6 lunes 22 17 00 00 232 1 lunes 22 17 30 00 232 4 lunes 22 18 00 00 231 1 i ab ah ab ae ob ab c n 3 e o t mh eb eb eb eh ub 4 co co co co co Tab T b Cn co 224 1 Back Next 7 Goto 187 Groupedby 2 Period Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 30 Table of values Note that the typical value table consists of three parts e Title This usually indicates what data period we are viewing although in special tables it may contain other information e Body This contains a series of columns with the values each variable has in each register Each column is a variable and contains a header with the same title e Toolbar As in the graph the grouping and
69. 1 2 96 12 00 2 00AM 4 00 6 00 8 00 10 00 12 00 2 00 4 00 6 00 8 00 10 00 Sep 17 2008 Date Next 12 Go to 22 Grouped by 5 Period Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 9 23 08 10 30 57 AM Request to force variables sent Graph in Tooltip mode As you can see for each area of representation with the same X axis a window is shown with the value of the X axis typically the date and information on the variables that are represented in this X position typically the variable name its value and its units You can change the behaviour of this mode by clicking the Control key so as to show only the information window of the area on which the mouse cursor can be found at any time In graphs with a high density of values the case may arise that several different values with different X coordinates of a variable fall into the same position of the mouse In this case there will be no values accessible through the mouse cursor movement To access all the values without omitting any we can move the value display window using the cursor keys left or right these keys allow us to move to the value immediately before or immediately after the current although this is drawn in the same position of the screen 259 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Some types of graphs can give the situation that on the same X coordinate there is more than one value of the same variable this
70. 1 VI1 215 CVM 1 VI1 221 CVM 1 VI1 224 Another option would be to draw the level control at the bottom of the SCADA screen and use various paint pot controls to paint the desired zone Thus we could draw on the screen background something like the following SS SS eS eS The inner part although it seems all the same colour white it is not and is divided into grids with different whites indistinguishable one from the other and by the human eye for example it is impossible to distinguish between white RGB 255 255 255 and white RGB 254 255 255 Then we place the paint pot on each table with the desired condition and tolerance 0 to prevent painting adjacent tables which are very similar in colour With this the result is a progress bar or control level which can be configured as desired 14 4 19 How can change the properties of control in accordance with a condition The properties of control cannot be changed in accordance with a condition However we can simulate the change of these properties using a conditional control Thus for example if we wish to change the colour of a text in accordance with a condition we add a conditional control with two text type controls which are exactly the same but of a different colour and specify which conditions need to be fulfilled for each one to be shown Likewise we can also change the orientation font size etc We can also make a control be an image or a te
71. 11 0 4 23 12 13 2 22 14 21 20 16 18 18 17 representation of type of day selected Day type E None gt 15 Configuration of each one of the 7 days of the week where the type of day selector contains the different types of days configured see 10 1 1 Daily showing the It will 208 also be possible not to select any in which case the event will not be disabled during this day PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 1 3 Annual This type of timetable corresponds to a calendar where different types of days can be configured for several years As with the weekly type the different types of day that may be selected correspond to different configured daily types Modify timetable Mame Business calendar Year weekend da enero febrero marzo abril lun mar mi jus sib lun mar mi jue vis sib dom lun mar mi jue vie sab lun mar mi jue vie sab dom O day mayo julio agosto lun mar mi jus sib dom lun mar mi jus vie sib dom lun mar mi jue vie sab lun mar mi jue vie sab dom septiembre octubre noviembre diciembre lun mar mi jus sib lun mar mi jus vis sib dom lun mar mi jue vie z b lun mar mi jue vie sab dom Accept 3 Cancel Mame Alphanumeric type data which permits the type of year within the events timetable to be uniquely Calendar configuration is the same as that explained
72. 24 CVM SP 3 24 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVM SP Driver parameters Device parameters y step Variable units Variable limits 3 24 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CVM SP configuration Device Information Password Peripheral number Enable password 1 Password Identifier Version C M SP 4 00 Repeat password Description Transformation ratio Masimeter Period Primary Secundary 1 5 Voltage Unit Active power Current Distortion calculation Energy counters THD Effective value fundamental Accept Cancel Device Information Peripheral number 1 C M SP Identifier Version C M SP 4 00 Description Shows general information 120 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Password Enable password Password Repeat password Enables the password to be enabled or deactivated to block the configuration of the device by means of the keyboard Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage no i i Current B e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary
73. 270 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph MAIN PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous v g Devices 3 Screens Reports Vas Graph Events em Properties Print Voltage L1 V Voltage L2 V Voltage L3 V amp V THD d L1 96 Current L1 Current L2 A n Wl 16 5 19 2008 O Back Next 72 Goto f Grouped by 4j Period Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 Graph where we have forced the interior limit of a Y axis Finally the only configuration of the areas that we may change is its position So like variables and axes a zone can be dragged to another position but only within another outside or to the trash deleting all axes and variables that it contains Trash One of the most interesting possibilities offered by the property screen is to add new variables to the chart This is done by clicking on the button with the sign located on the lower left Add new variables to the graph Then we have the windows for selecting equipment and variables allowing us to add other variables including from a different device In the example we have added a phase 1 voltage variable from other equipment 271 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 0 0 233 7 Voltage L1 Voltage 2 Voltage L3 1 0 2 2 V THD d L1 81 0 511 0 Adding a variable from another device Note that the device information has disappeared
74. 2s lunes 22 04 00 00 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 4h 28m 8s 2m 05 lunes 22 04 03 02 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 not applied gt 1s lunes 22 04 28 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied 55 lunes 22 04 35 02 Error del CVM Harm nicos Armonicos STATUS 1 88 secondo lt 5 lt not applied gt 35 lunes 22 04 37 03 Error del Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 not applied gt 2s lunes 22 04 43 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 5s lunes 22 04 48 00 del CVM Harm nicos KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 55 lunes 22 04 50 04 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 not applied gt 1s lunes 22 04 51 01 Error del CVM Harm nicos KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 2s lunes 22 04 55 02 Error del CVM Harm nicos KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp secondo lt 5 lt not applied gt T 25 lunes 22 04 56 03 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 not applied gt 1s lunes 2
75. Detection mode HIGH Channel 1 04 anne Low Type of toroid _ Delay time s Number of reclosures 30 m WIS Instantaneous d Operating mode Earth leakage mode Delay time OFF s Time between reclosing 5 Relay mode 04 1 of relay output Latch selection Type of tine between reclosing Normally open With latch option f Normal Normally closed C Without latch option Exponential ew Accept Cancel 60 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Informatian Peripheral number 10 COR Identifier Version COR 1 60 Description Shows general information Configure prealarm of prealarm relay Normally open f Normally closed Prealarm threshold 2 AO The following can be configured of pre alarm relay Operation method of the pre alarm relay common to all channels of the device Pre alarm threshold Pre alarm threshold the equipment possesses This can vary between 50 and 100 of the minimum trigger threshold of the device channels Defined values Current Delay time s A trigger threshold and a user personalised delay time can be configured by the user These parameters are common to all channels of the device Depending on the type of channel selected the customised threshold may be selected or not Device Enable reclosing M Spnchronise clack This selector allows
76. K configuration 3248 32xC 32WE C Expansion card 232 t ER 232 t RED 2 t 485 ER 485 t RED 420 1 t RED M amp X Maximum demand variable Scale Active power dum High Apparent power Current Accept Cancel The user must select the correct information corresponding to the device connected Model Ca CEHO s aes 4 C Paden 32E 34xE C 2 S2WW C 34ux C Haye Device model Using the model PowerStudio can ascertain which variables are measured by the device thus avoiding variables not possessed by the device being asked for Expansion card 232 t ER 232 RED t RED 2 485 ER 485 t RED 420 1 t RED M amp X Expansion card 95 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Masximurn demand variable Active power Apparent power f Current Variable used to calculate the maximum demand Scale f Low t High Measurement scale of the variables This will be used by PowerStudio for the correct visualisation of the values shown on screen 3 19 2 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVMK Driver parameters Device parameters a Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 19 2 1 Device parameters is not possible to configure the device when it communicates via
77. Maminal Prealarm Alarm 50 25 230 25 50 Minimum v hd asinum Nominal 230 vi The nominal value of the variable The units used to express this value are indicated in the brackets If the nominal value is 0 the alarm is disabled For the power factor the nominal value should be 1 to enable the alarm or O to disable it Alarm x Prealarm Minimum 26 Percentage of nominal value for the pre alarm or alarm signal In this case when the variable value is between 25 and 50 below the nominal value there will be a pre alarm signal if it is below 50 the signal will be an alarm For the power factor the desired alarm and alarm between 0 0 and 0 0 are entered Prealarm Alarm Maximum Percentage of nominal value for the pre alarm or alarm signal In this case when the variable value is between 25 and 50 above nominal value there will be a pre alarm signal if it is above 50 the signal will be the alarm For the power factor the desired alarm and alarm alarm between 0 0 and 0 0 are entered If the pre alarm value is equal to the value of the alarm the pre alarm zone will be disabled passing directly from the normal state to the alarm status 44 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 2 C 14d 3 2 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options C14d a Driver parameters Device parameters y step Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Uni
78. OFF OFF ss y Reconnection enabled Reconnection enabled Reset Reset Reset 70 2 1 21 21 1 97 Adjust Adjust Adjust Adjust Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 ON OFF OFF O OFF Prealarm x 5 0095 T 0 088 Reconnection enabled Reconnection enabled Reconnection enabled Reset Reset Reset 140 21 21 21 Adjust Adjust Adjust Adjust Where Channel 5 Channel 6 ie 3 11 OFF Prealarm 12 Reconnection enabled 21 Adjust 1 Channel status e Status ON e Pre alarm status e Status OFF 2 Relay status e ON Non latched channel e OFF Latched channel 3 Additional information on the status of the channel e Pre alarm Pre alarm enabled e Heclosure Channel disconnected with time reclosure process e Remote Channel disconnected by external triggering cannot be automatically reconnected 10 11 12 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Reclosure enabled Informs that the reclosures for the channel have been enabled Reset button If the channel is not triggered the button will remain disabled Click on the button to reset the channel Off button External disconnection of the channel The button will remain disabled if the channel has not been triggered Adjustment button Enables the sensitivity programming and channel delay Channel information is also shown Trip threshold value configured for the channel Pre al
79. SCADA screens is enabled for graphs 12 2 8 8 Export graph The user may at any time export the graph being viewed in a PNG format This option should be accessed through Export in the Options menu of the main menu Note that this option unlike that in the SCADA screens is enabled for graphs Note that when you export a graph this is done with a white background to facilitate the inclusion of it in reports studies etc 12 2 8 9 Types of graph So far we have seen standard graph types i e a graph which consists of a number of areas and where each zone has an X axis which is a time interval while the Y axis are the values of the variables However there are certain types of graphs that have certain distinct characteristics A special graph would be a harmonics graph This chart is provided by equipment which calculates harmonics variables whether it is voltage or power For example we find this kind of graph on QNA equipment among others and can provide the outage of voltage in each phase b Graph QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZ7ER9 23 08 12 50 00 PM PowerStudio Scada n rm Dd Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens E Reports Graph Table YD Events Properties 2 Print QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER 9 23 08 12 50 00 PM Current harmonics L1 96 Current harmonics L2 96 an Current harmonics L3 96 Voltage harmonics L1 96 Voltage harmonics L2 96 m Voltage harmonics L3 96 23 4 5 6
80. Selecting the line style We may also choose the line thickness 265 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Selecting the line thickness If the kind of representation we have selected is dots we can select the type of dots Selecting the type of dots Suppose that in the example we modify the representation of the bar variable and change the colour to a deep lilac Note that it is possible to change the colour for any kind of representation by clicking with the left mouse button on the colour chart Selecting the type of bar representation bar using lilac This selection will be reflected in the screen properties of the graph 266 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph properties V MAIN 88 0 234 0 Voltage L1 Voltage 2 Voltage L3 96 MAIN 1 0 2 5 V THD d L1 MAIN 78 7 521 6 Current 11 Current L2 Change in representation properties of a variable A final property that can be changed on a variable is its position on the overall chart To make this change simply drag the variable that we want to modify to its new location While dragging the variable we will be informed of the positions where we can drop the variable and where not using the red or green squares Thus a variable cannot be released on another variable does not make sense or on an axis with a white background with units different to those of the units of the variable that we are releasing We can however
81. Table gt Events Properties JA Print 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 320 QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events Semicycle effective voltage L2 Sag 20 ms 89 60 Vn Vm 89 63 Vn Va 90 03 Vn QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events Semicycle effective voltage L3 Sag 10 ms 89 70 Vn Vm 89 70 Vn Va 90 21 Vn Date time QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events GNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 820 231 81 231 53 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 830 231 66 1231 48 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 840 231 78 231 64 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 850 231 73 1231 51 712 08 8 23 03 PM 860 231 68 231 51 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 870 231 76 231 59 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 880 231 81 231 53 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 890 231 81 231 56 72 08 8 23 03 900 231 63 1231 61 72 08 8 23 03 PM 910 231 91 231 71 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 920 231 86 231 69 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 930 231 53 231 51 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 940 231 53 231 51 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 950 231 53 231 61 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 960 231 84 231 74 7 12 08 8 23 03 970 231 76 231 71 7 12 08 8 23 03 980 231 58 231 48 7 12 08 8 23 03 PM 990 231 60 231 25 7 12 08 8 23 04 000 231 32 231 30 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 010 231 43 231 41 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 020 231 50 1231 35 7 12 08 8 23 04 030 231 48 1231 46 7 12 08 8 23 04 040 231 73 231 51 7 12 08 8 23 04 050 231 58 231 30 7 12 08 8 23 04 060 231 37 1231 25 7 12 08
82. The range allowed depends on the selected variable Min The minimum value to control is configured The range allowed depends on the selected variable Delay Delay in seconds in activating the alarm 106 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Delay off Delay in seconds in deactivating the alarm Lese Allows output equations to be configured Clicking on the button the following dialogue will appear Equations configuration Configuration of Ehe digital output equation 1 Output equation 02 0304 0g x Cancel Where the alarm and the operation to be carried can be selected alternately AND or OR To obtain more information on the operation of the digital output equations consult the device manual 107 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 20 1 2 2 Analogue inputs outputs N Depending on the card model the number of inputs and outputs may vary CVMk configuration Expansion card Analog B Inputs 4 Outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Type Name Unit zer Fullscale Decimals Accept Cancel Using 929 the configuration between the input configuration and the output configuration of the card may be changed The previous image shows the configuration of the analogue inputs For each of the analogue inputs the following can be configured e Type Type of input enables the different types of input signal accepted by the device to
83. Variable limits It is also possible to view this clicking the Devices button on the toolbar The tree on the left of the window shows the status of all configured devices By clicking the right mouse button on the tree the following context menu will appear w Show For connection Show For device Expand all Contract all Where the different options are o Show by Connection The devices are shown as they have been entered onto the device screen see section 2 2 1 Devices where the first and second level devices are displayed Factory as 2 Serial Port 1 as 1 as 3 Temperature Measure 3 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada o Show as per device The devices will be classified according to the type of device EJ comis Gas 1 9 ig DH 96 e Temperature Measure Jw RS232 485 g serial Port 1 ET TCPZRS Factory o Expand all Clicking on this option the entire tree will drop down showing all the devices Factory Factory Serial Port 1 g Gas 2 Serial Port 1 Gas 1 Gas 3 Temperature Measure o Contract all Clicking on this option will hide second level devices Factory n e Factory 9 g Gas 2 Serial Port 1 Serial Port 1 as 1 Gas 3 e Temperature Measure We may find the following states are possible OK equipment communicates properly Downloading of the device We are down
84. X x gj CVMK HAR dno cc cup c gp o o n ir oo CVM MINI L we nq o X dL _ X ax CVMNRG96 x Xx x x x x x X x CVM SP X POWERNET X X Xx j X x x x x j x pj LONA _ x o Voltage distortion on neutral Instantaneous Maximum Minimum Te i i Th 2 O tc NEN Voltage distortion Higher percentile 95 All registers Valid registers SS DV1SUPT DV2SUPT DV3SUPT DVSUPT DV1SUPV DV2SUPV DV3SUPV DVSUPV pe gp Oe gp see 3E 9a et ee 14 1 2 Current Current Instantaneous Maximum L3 _ L2 L3 M X p 0 144 110 O CVM96 O0O Jj CVMBBD 0 CVMMBC 0O 9 p __ 1 49 CVMK2 TX p o EN GENE X X X QNA 294 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Leakage current AELI AELMX AELMN CVM 144 X 2 x x x X X X X X ERE EE ZEN po Le NES Lx NE SEN EFE Low EE MES es X X Current distortion on neutral DANI DANMX DANMN CVM K2 po 14 1 3 Frequency 6 0 0X XX X G A X PMKLCD 0X
85. a version which the programme does not support Perhaps it is an old version VV Phase error The equipment communicates correctly but some phase connection is incorrect B Channel error Unable to open the communication port This action must be carried out to establish communication with the device Failed communications Some of the devices connected to this equipment do not communicate properly e Camera transmitting images The engine is receiving images from the camera as the client application is requesting them 239 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada e I Camera paused The engine is not receiving images from the camera because they are not necessary because they are not being requested by any client application Error on the memory card The SD Memory Card is invalid write protected or not present When selecting a device from this tree any node on the right panel we can see the characteristics of it Typically these features are a picture of themselves the type of device the name description and device number This tree can be completely folded down quickly by clicking the right mouse button It also can be folded down completely by clicking the middle mouse button which is usually accessed by clicking the scroll wheel on it The device status tree can be organised in two ways by connection or by type of device To change the representation of the same access the option of Properties from the to
86. are going to move the distortion variable in the area where the currents are at the top in order for it to be painted first 267 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada V MAIN 88 0 234 0 Voltage L1 Voltage 2 Voltage L3 96 MAIN ni 25 V THD d L1 MAIN 78 7 521 8 Current 1 1 Current 12 Moving a variable in another area With this we can create a new axis within the area where the currents are found Note that the area where the variable was found has disappeared and therefore and now the graph contains two areas Note also that in the second zone the distortion axis is painted first and therefore the distortion variable of phase 1 and after the current first phase 1 and then phase 2 In this case we get a graph as follows 268 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph MAIN PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous v g Devices Screens Reports 2c Graph gt Events em Properties B Print Voltage L1 V Voltage L2 V Voltage L3 V TEE VTH Li Current L2 A CLEEOLAUUCLUCCCOLQCOOe ULAAU O LC COOOO O OC V THD d L1 96 Current L1 A Current L2 A Qo Back o Next 72 Goto f Grouped by 4 Period 2 0 1 8 1 6 4 2008 Q Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 Graph with two zones and two axes in an area The axes of a graph can also be configured through the properties window do so once in th
87. b dom DOECS 4 5 7 2 4 5 s 3 mn 12 ew Quick selection We can assign types of days not only to the days of the year in course but also to previous and forthcoming years Selecting the days can be carried out in the following ways e Click twice with the left mouse button on one day highlighting only the selected day e Click once with the left mouse button on a start day and then holding down the Shift key click once with the left mouse button on the final day thus selecting every day between the start day and the end day e Using the quick selection option Listing with the different types of day configured in the tariff Summer day Type of day that will be assigned to the calendar if selections are made it if there is no kind of day selected will appear indicating that the days on the calendar will be selected rather than deleted _ S Queso With this option selections will be made automatically The following dialogue will appear 174 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Quick selection fear 2008 Days r Months Monday W January W July Tuesday February w August Wednesd oy ae March W September Thursday v April W October Saturday May I November Sunday June December Day type B Winter day Accept Cancel In this case every working day of 2005 will be checked with the type of day Winter Day 175 PowerStudio P
88. be selected e Name A brief description of the analogue input for its identification on the screen of the device e Unit A brief description of the measuring units of the analogue input so it can be viewed on the screen of the device e Zero Parameter value that zero on the scale is assigned to Fullscale Value of the parameter to which the maximum value of the scale is assigned e Decimals Number of decimals of the value measured by the analogue input The configuration of the analogue outputs can be seen in the following picture 108 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada CVMk configuration Expansion card Analog B Inputs 4 Outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs variable zer Fullscale 1 Voltage Li fy 10 20 m 9 999 9 999 2 Reactive power L2 4 20 m 102 1 160 2 3 Reactive power consumed L1 10 20 m 0 44 4 Reactive power generated L3 14120 m 3 333 Where for each of the analogue outputs the following can be configured e Variable Permits any parameter that measures the devices that could be used for analogue outputs to be selected e Type Allows us to select from among the different types of output that the device can generate e Zero Value of the parameter to which the zero of the scale is assigned Fullscale Value of the parameter to which the maximum value of the scale is assigned 109 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 20 1 2 3 4 d
89. by this type of device Digital outputs LCIRWATT X X x 5 x JJ Jj S S E o gt 09 e E xD e _ O e ee uir CVMK2 0 J 0 _ O CVMR o Oo o o O f 3 j XK CVMNRG9O6 X S l e S S S O 10 0O MED _ qur eus ld udo 1 po Ege qu 9c 1 Digital outputs may be forced to 0 the output will remain open or to 1 the output will remain closed 14 1 10 Counters x 25 50 CVM K2 oe OOo o ed LM 24 5 LM50 The values of the counters on the LM50 devices may be forced between 0 and the maximum value permitted by the device See the device manual for more details on this maximum value All counter variables can be discriminated 302 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 11 Special device variables 14 1 11 1 C 14d eu Curent Active Qus Digitaloutput distortion 2099 Quadrant Aarm aee COSI QUADRANT ALARM Do Dox 149 X Active Quadrant Energy consumed 10 Energy consumed Capacitive system Energy consumed Inductive system Energy generated Energy generated Capacitive system EN 5 Energy generated Inductive system None Compensation alarm CE a Overcurrentalarm AE 2 Distortionalarm dE 13 Setup error alarm 4 Expansion card
90. can be selected Size L 2 Corresponds to the size of the text font of the formula The size could be between 1 and 90 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available Orientation degrees u Corresponds to the orientation of text formula The orientation expressed in degrees could be between 0 and 350 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available 5 Clicking on the button the colour formula of the text can be selected Custom colors 255 120 Red 255 DS ColorlSolid Lum 120 Blue n Cancel Add to Custom Colors Alignment This will permit us to decide on which of the rectangle defined in report sheet the text formula will be situated Numerical format Integers Decimals Automatic 3 1 Using these selectors the number of whole and decimal numbers shown by the result value of the formula calculation can be specified Zeosonthelett This option will only be available if a specific number of whole numbers has been specified in the previous option 2 e ekt f the value resulting from the formula does not reach the specified whole number the remaining spaces will be filled with zeros 2 This option will be available only in the event that a specific number of decimal places has been selected in the previous
91. configuration Device Infarmatian Peripheral number 33 LM4 M Identifier Version 4 1 10 Description Relay Timer 1 1200 x 20 ms 4000 ms 3 50 x 2l ms 1000 ms 2 1100 x 20 ms 2000 ms 4 25 x 20 ms 500 ms Meters hi 5 2 2793 4 150 Iv Load values in device meters Accept Cancel 137 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number i LM4 M Identifier Version LM4 1 1 Description Shows general information Relay Timer 1 1200 x Z0 ms 4000 ms 3 50 x 2l ms 1000 ms 2 1100 x 20 ms 2000 ms 4 25 ms 500 ms Configuration of the pulse duration that can be generated with the digital outputs of the device Meters 1 H2 0 3 161 2 2793 4 150 Iv Load values in device meters This part of the configuration corresponds to the device counters If the selector is checked on sending the configuration the energy counter will be loaded with the values entered into the corresponding boxes 3 29 1 2 Device inputs For each of the inputs of the LMAI 4O M three variables will be available a digital display to show the status of the input open closed a counter variable to show the number of pulses detected at the input and finally a flow variable calculated by the software as an estimate of the pulse frequency on the input during a period of time Using this dialogue the inputs and outputs of the LM4I 40 M can be configure
92. counter variable to show the number of pulses detected in the input and finally a flow variable calculated by the software as an estimate of the pulse frequency that occurs in the input during a period of time By means of this dialogue the LM50 TCP input can be configured Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Flow Inputs from 1 ta 10 Inputs from 11 to 20 Inputs from 21 to 30 Inputs from 31 to 40 Inputs from 41 to 50 Description Upit Factor Using the ters Entradas digitales Caudales the configuration display of the different types of variables can be configured The previous image shows the configuration of the counters where e Description Alphanumeric type which permits a brief description of the counter so it can be identified better e Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units where the counter is displayed to be entered e Factor Multiplicative value of each input pulse For digital inputs Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Flow Inputs from 1 ta 10 Inputs 11 to 20 Inputs from 21 to 30 Inputs from 31 to 40 Inputs from 41 to 50 Description 143 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the digital input to be entered for better identification Finally for the flow configuration Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Flow Inputs from 1 ta 10
93. data introduced by the user were incorrect it could give communication errors making it impossible for PowerStudio to show the values measured by the device On adding a device an MODBUSTCP connection see section 3 10 TCP2RS Modbus TCP Converter PowerStudio will display the following warning PowerStudio 5cada ATTENTION The device is trying to communicate through a Modbus TCP connection Communication is now allowed only For monitoring sa remote device configuration is disabled For correct communication with the device is necessary select some additional parameters wich cannot be read by the software in the Following screen Then dialogue box will appear with the information PowerStudio needs to communicate with the device CVM B BD configuration BHs Bliss Maximum demand variable Active power Apparent power f Curent Accept Cancel The user must select the correct information corresponding to the device connected fe t Bliss Device model Using the model PowerStudio can ascertain which variables are measured by the device thus avoiding variables not possessed by the device being asked for Scale f Low t High Measurement scale of the variables This will be used by PowerStudio for the correct visualisation of the values shown on screen Id asinum demand variable Active power Apparent power f Current Var
94. defined formula F x If we want to add one of the functions provided x If we want to add other symbols The wizard options are as follows o Add a reference to a variable of a device Selecting this option will display a window where we can choose the device from which one of its variables will be added to the formula 312 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada i Select driver Groups Group 1 group devices Er a Furnace 1 1 Group 2 1 Group 3 7 PowerStudio Scada Discriminator p None gt Cancel Likewise we will have the option of specifying a previously defined specific discriminator see chapter 7 by way of the selection using the control Discriminator E Mane gt gt Once we have chosen unit and the discriminator where appropriate the variables selection window will be displayed allowing us to pick the variable to be entered in the formula see 4 Selection of variables o Add a reference to an already defined formula This option enables us to enter a reference to another previously defined formula This option is only available in reports and SCADA screens Selecting this option will display a window where a previously defined formula can be selected Formula to be referenced in the expression Formulae Formule 1 Furnace 1 11 Furnace 1 V12 Formule 1 Accept Cancel o Add one of the functions provided This option allows us to access
95. device it will only be possible to show information about it CVM RB configuration Device Information Peripheral number 33 CV M R8 ANALOG Identifier Version CYM R 9421 Description Ax Cancel 118 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 23 1 2 Analogue inputs and outputs From this dialogue the analogue inputs on the CVM R8 devices with analogue inputs and or outputs can be configured Configure inputs outputs Analog inputs Description Unit ero Fullscale if fo Re o zi po fo fio zi p B fe zi A B fH sp fo fiw gt p r e o gt Analog outputs Description Unit Fullscale Type p T 5 Des fae po p RB e xi Accept Cancel Description Alphanumeric type information which enables a brief description to be entered for better identification Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units to be entered Zero Value of the parameter to which the zero of the scale is assigned Fullscale Value of the parameter to which the maximum value of the scale is assigned Type Type of entry allows between 0 20 mA 4 20 mA or 0 to be chosen V 3 23 1 3 Variable limits Only for CVM R8 devices with analogue inputs This option has been detailed in section 3 1 3 Variable limits 119 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3
96. does not happen if the X axis is time but it can happen in other cases as for example in an event duration graph which will be seen later In these cases the maximum and minimum value of each variable in that X coordinate will be shown 12 2 8 4 Magnifying glass mode The Magnifying glass mode allows us to see an expansion in a separate window for the area around the position of the mouse The enlargement window is updated instantly as you move the mouse cursor always showing the area around it If we enter on the magnifying glass mode and the cursor remains on the representation area an enlargement window will automatically appear and a dotted box will appear in the drawing area indicating that the area is enlarging represented by the mouse cursor and we can move around as we wish automatically displaying the enlargement in the superimposed window V a W Graph CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada n 5 bd Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens Reports Va Graph Table Events Properties 2 Print CVM144 Izquierda Voltage L1 V Magnifying glass Voltage L1 V 15 Sep 2008 o Back Next 12 Goto d Grouped by 4 7 00PM 9 00PM 11 00PM 1 00AM 3 00AM 5 00AM 7 00AM 9 00AM Sep 16 2008 Sep 17 2008 Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Date Zoom mode graph with an extended zone we leave the representation area the enlargement window will disappear and on returning ther
97. except for some equipment which allows some of its features to be changed whenever the user connected has sufficient permission to make this change In the edit mode it will be possible to modify the configuration parameters for the software and the configured devices In this operation mode it will be possible to edit the SCADA screens and reports and actions such as adding display controls modifying controls etc can be carried out Once the SCADA screens have been edited it will be necessary to move onto the run mode to run the screens The Java Client cannot communicate with the engine while it is in the edit mode We can use a password to block the edition mode avoiding possible modifications of the configuration whether by error or by non authorised personnel To enable the edit password select the most suitable option in the Preferences dialogue see section 2 2 12 Preferences On moving from the run mode to the edit mode and with the edition password enabled the correct password should be entered in the following dialogue box Password Accept Cancel Otherwise you will not be able to enter the edit mode 35 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 3 Edit Menu Cut Paste Delete Select all Ctrl E The options from this menu are only enabled when editing SCADA screens or reports NO 9 1 Cut Using this option the controls selected are copied onto the clipboard and a
98. flow and counter variable that can be used on the DH 96 CT equipment be configured e Counter Variable o Description Alphanumeric type data which allows a brief description of the input for better identification o Unit Alphanumeric type data which enables a brief description of the input units to be entered o Factor Multiplier factor to be applied to the value read from the device e Flow variable The input will be treated as a flow counter The value of this variable is calculated from the counter variable value read from the device o Enabling flow variable Using this option it is possible to enable or disable the use of the software of the device input as if it were a flow counter If this is disabled it will not be displayed nor will it be possible to use this variable on the software o Description Alphanumeric type data which allows a brief description of the input for better identification o Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units to be entered o Factor multiplier to be applied to the value read from the device o Time Parameter to calculate the flow value o Calculation window Window time in seconds that the software will use to calculate an estimate of the flow taking into account the value of the device counter 125 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 26 EDMk 3 26 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options EDMk Driver parameters y
99. following sections dm Properties D Print e Export Options menu Properties Provides access to the properties of the currently active view This option can be active or not depending on the view in progress Print Print view currently active This option can be active or not depending on the view in progress Export Exports currently active view This option can be active or not depending on the view in progress Exit Exit the client This option is not available when the client is embedded on the website of the application The Views menu consists of the following sections o Previous Historic Study Screens Reports LJ Devices Events P Devices status Views Menu Previous Allows the previous view to be accessed Next Allows access to the next view Data log Allows immediate access to any logged view Studio Gives access to graph and tables views Screens Study Menu Screens Allows direct access to one of the SCADA screens defined by the user in the engine editor in the edit mode 228 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada e Reports Allows direct access to one of the user defined reports on the engine editor in the edit mode e Devices Allows direct access to the monitoring device view of a particular device through the device tree LJ Devices gt _ CIRCUTORBARCELONA gt FILTER Events iJ Calculated variables EARTH LEAKAGE PROTECTION
100. for example to ascertain the value detected of a variable that has enabled the event The annotations will be explained in more detail in section 10 3 1 Annotation Publish on activating Publish on desactivating Publish on recognizing Can be configured if Rss notifications are generated on enabling disabling or acknowledging the event In this case only the enabling and disabling of the event will appear This option will only appear if the Rss of events on the software preference screen has been enabled see section 2 2 12 Preferences Arguments Formula 1 Furnace 1 V11 Add Modify wj Delete The arguments will allow formulas to be configured for their use in event annotation and actions These formulas are calculated at the time of their use being useful to display the value which has provoked the event as shown in the example The engine actions tabs allow the actions for each state of the event carried out by the communication engine to be configured while for actions in the client application those actions to be carried out by the client application are configured The actions are explained in more detail in section in section 10 3 2 Actions 215 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 3 1 Annotation The annotation of an event will correspond to a text with a number of variable parameters which is associated with the activation of an event The parameters will be replaced by their
101. from now on will be termed second level devices Clicking the Ada button to left of the dialogue the following dialogue will appear New device Convertors ai BH HH A A A RS232 485 TCP2RS TEP2RS TCP2RS Generic UDP Genetic TCP Generic MadbusT CP RS 485 MadbusT CP Measure CIR WATT RS232 CIR WATT C M 144 CVM 144 9 Ethernet 9 Ethernet CV ME Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet ModbusT CP ModbusT CP ModbusT CP Inputs Outputs ee Se aes Cs Siege 5 5 ModbusT CP TCPSO ALARM Quality T i 412 R5232 412 Ethernet 41 3 5232 413 Ethernet Camera IP Left click on the device you want to add to the program configuration From here the device we wish to add can be selected As has been previously mentioned in this dialogue only direct connection devices appear either with a network connection or with an RS232 connection directly to the PC and communication converters Bear in mind that if any of the first level devices are deleted second level devices connected to them will also be deleted Once the first level device has been selected the devices connected to it may be added by clicking on the Ada button to the right of the dialogue In this case only those devices which can be connected to a first level device appear in the dialogue selection 11 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scad
102. from the axes and appears on each variable because now there are no variables of a single device represented The new variable or new variables if we had chosen several are organized into new areas at the end and the limits of the new lines are unknown because the limits have not yet been loaded with data although they may be forced by the user In the example we have dragged the new variable onto the axis of the first zone particularly on the top of the axis leaving the new variable as the first on the list Note how the axis limits have been inherited where we have released them 2 2 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph properties QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Voltage L1 Voltage L1 Voltage 2 Voltage L3 V THD d L1 81 0 511 0 MAIN Current L1 MAIN Current L2 Variables of different devices in the same axis One detail to remember is the fact that dragging the variable to its new position we have two variables in the same axis and the same area with the same colour This may be a problem for display There are two ways to solve the problem the first is to change by hand the colour of the representation of one of the variables and the second is to let the program decide the appropriate distribution of colours by itself This latter is done by clicking on the button represented by a brush x Intelligent distribution colour brush Clicking on this button the program will decide whether there
103. information indicating whether it is a gap an interruption or overvoltage e Value of the event This indicates the most representative value of the event If this is an overvoltage this value is the highest achieved by the event in other cases this is the minimum value reached It is expressed as a percentage of the nominal voltage e Duration The first value in brackets indicates the duration of the event e Average voltage Indicates average voltage of the event expressed as a percentage of the nominal voltage Previous Voltage Indicates the voltage there was at the beginning of the event expressed as a percentage of the voltage 282 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Table Date time QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events History L 1 Vn QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events History L2 Vn QNA QUALITY NETWORK A m bd Options Views General o Previous Next v Devices Screens Reports aa Graph mu Table gt de Properties d Print julio 2008 Dalelime QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Eve QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Eve QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Eve 0 QU 7 28 08 10 00 00 PM 100 80 10119 10100 7 29 08 11 00 00 PM 100 98 7 30 08 12 00 00 AM 100 80 100 87 7 30 08 1 00 00 AM 100 71 100 73 7 30 08 2 00 00 AM 100 72 100 70 7 30 08 3 00 00 AM 100 88 100 86 7 30 08 4 00 00 AM 101 06 101 05 7 30 08 5 00 00 AM 100 65 1100 67 7130 08 6 00 00 1
104. information when carrying out the XML request Each of the variables that the value is required from should be included in the petition as var device variable And if you want to get information from all the variables of a device this must be indicated as id device With it being possible to request information from one or more variables and one or more devices in the same request Where lt varInfo gt lt var gt lt id gt es lt 1 gt lt title gt title hasValue T hasValue gt lt hasLogger gt T hasLogger gt sampleMode sampleMode measureUnits measureUnits unitsFactoro lt unitsFactor gt decimals decimals gt lt gt lt varInfo gt Main field which identifies the XML as a response to the request for information about variables var Information from each of the variables requested id Variable name in device variable format see 14 1 Variables title Brief description of the variable hasValue Indicates if it is possible to ask the instantaneous value of the variable T or not F hasLogger Indicates whether it is possible to ask the log value of the variable T or not F sampleMode Variable type mode used to group together the values of a variable none Without type average Average value max Maximum value min Maximum value pfAverage Power factor average value pfMax Power factor maximum value pfMin Pow
105. is enabled the actions performed by users will be saved whether they have been granted access to the resource or if they have been denied it 2f PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada ASS setup lf Active events ASS Server URL Number of R55 items The engine can be configured as a RSS content producer so that we can generate news related to the events which can be consulted by any RSS news reader available free for almost any platform and environment To do so we activate the corresponding box in the window Configuration of the RSS feed and configure the two required fields In the URL server field the address to which the HTML server is configured is added and in the Number of news feeds we add the maximum number of news stories we want to publish stories are published in a circle so that when the maximum number of stories are published the oldest are removed to continue publishing new stories Typically browsers detect that the server contains an RSS feed and allow access thereto subscribe PowerStudio Scada Windows Internet Explorer 56 http 192 168 1 11 8080 htmlfindex html he pi Powerstudio Scada m B mh v Page Tools Message the Internet Explorer about RSS FEED found For example the RSS newsreader provided by Internet Explorer would allow us to consult the news published by the engine and is displayed as follows
106. logical Y amp amp logical and logical NO Remember that the comparison operators require the terms to the left and right be of the numerical kind while the logical operators require expressions to be conditions Thus examples of correct conditions would include CVMK VII 240 F1 1 10 amp amp lt 20 Expressions and variables are always of the numerical type real while the conditions are the Boolean type 14 2 1 Wizard for the Creation of Expressions and Conditions PowerStudio has an assistant or wizard for creating conditions and expressions This wizard can be accessed by Clicking the button which is next to the text controls where we can manually enter the terms and conditions Clicking on this button will bring up the following window Formula creation assistance What do you want to add to the formula want ta add a reference to another already existing formula f want ta add one of the formulae supplied want ta add other symbols operations values v Accept Cancel Here we can select what we wish to add to the expression The option will be added in the position of the cursor in the text control associated to the expression The lower part of the dialogue shows where we will enter what we want to add Vx If we want to add a reference to a variable of a unit Fx If we want to add a reference to another already
107. lunes 22 01 57 00 Error CVM Harm nicos CVM KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp secondo lt 5 not applied gt T 5s lunes 22 02 00 00 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 6h 28m 95 2m 05 lunes 22 02 15 01 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 45 lunes 22 02 56 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS 1 amp amp secondg lt 5 not applied 55 lunes 22 03 00 00 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 5h 28m 8s 2m 05 lunes 22 03 00 33 jel primer evento Se cumpli la condicion trunc rand 3000 1 3000 lunes 22 03 07 57 el primer evento Se cumpli la condicion trunc rand 3000 1 3000 5h 27m 365 5h 20m 125 15 15 lunes 22 03 08 04 Error del Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS 1 88 second lt 5 lt not applied gt 25 lunes 22 03 11 00 Error del Harm nicos CVM Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 lt not applied gt 55 lunes 22 03 24 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM KArmonicos STATUS 1 amp amp secondo lt 5 lt not applied gt 25 lunes 22 03 27 00 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp second lt 5 not applied gt 5s lunes 22 03 33 04 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM K Armonicos STATUS 1 amp amp second lt 5 s not applied gt
108. m CIRCUTOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE POWERSTUDIO SCADA Version 2 7 USER MANUAL M98227501 03 09A CIRCUTOR S A PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada RUNNING THE PROGRAMME FOR THE FIRST TIME 8 MENU BAR dec 10 2 1 IN 20 oi aa ecg Mox ac kp ach ad MS Ces oe across sae oak aps ces a 10 2 2 SETUP MENU te iM n M bau Ut tabulae dM bns ku uh vam iu 10 2 201 TD CVC OS E 10 2 2 Il First level DC VIC devin r E disent va bb oat a ts 14 22 12 Adding a Second level Device oiu e etis Ponce io taedet Ferte 15 22 13 Advanced Contieuration of DEVICES ent nA M Ld 15 2 22 Groups Of 17 2 2 MULT t 19 2 2 4 Canac d PATO 20 2 255 CHR 20 2 2 6 Ima EMANAT ET zc Te ean ore 23 2 2 7 REPOTI m 25 2 2 6 nes 25 2 2 9 TIAS TAURI ITI IPRC TREE Tm 26 LAIO GOUD S CVI e H 26 PT MEM DLU cT eae Aa ahaa M 26 22025 26 2 212 NYO ALC RETI
109. much on camera settings as the configuration for refreshing when adding this device as well as the speed of the TCP IP network 246 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada C1 PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous lex v g Devices Screens Reports 2 Graph Table Events C1 9 22 08 1 36 19 PM y AlaskaCam com 09 22 08 03 33 35 Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 IP camera display screen In addition to the information already mentioned some devices allow interaction with the device itself or with the outside environment through the same screen display An interaction provided by many of the display screens on the devices offers the possibility of resetting the maximums and minimums This action is accessed via a button situated somewhere on the screen CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Qo Previous Nex v Devices Screens Reports 2e Graph Table gt Events ee Properties CVM1 44 Izquierda 9 18 08 10 12 35 AM xe nstantaneous Maximums amp Minimums ill Harmonics L1 L2 L3 Voltage Power Active KW Phase neutral V 1 22 iS 5 iat Inductive kvarL Apparent KVA Power factor Total distortion Cosine Phi Frequency Hz 50 0 Phase phase V 0 0 0 0 0 0 Maximum demand Current Maximum demand KW Current A Neutral current A E nalog inputs Analog input 1 Total distortion 96 Analog input 2 En
110. responsibility of the user For more information on how to configure the converter consult the device manual For more information on how to configure this converter see section 3 12 UDP Generic Converter 79 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 14 ModbusTCP generic Converter The ModbusTCP generic converter connects devices that work with serial communication RS 232 RS 485 to an Ethernet network using the IP protocol ModbusTCP for connection orientated communications Due to the large number of converters that can be found on the market On adding this device the program will not attempt to detect or verify that the configuration is correct The configuration and the proper functioning of communications between the converter and the program is the responsibility of user For more information on how to configure the converter consult the device manual For more information on how to configure this converter see section 3 12 Generic UDP Converter 80 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 15CVM 144 3 15 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVM 144 Driver parameters Device parameters y step Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 15 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software
111. run mode will be forced to the status established in each one of them defined below Value Opened Here we specify what action to take when the control is enabled in the execution mode open or close This selector will appear when the values to which it is possible to force the variable is a list of specific values for example for a digital output the options will be open or close If on the contrary the variable may be forced to any value for example a counter a field will appear where you can manually enter that value This selector will only be enabled when the following 199 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada box is checked Force directly with defined value jf this box is not checked the value that will appear in the control will be that defined by the user from the screen in the Java Client 8 2 1 9 Filling Control Filing control allows colour changing in homogeneous zones of the background or background image with all the same colour pixels regular or irregular The aspect in the edit mode is e marking the point of the pixel from where filling the area will begin In the running mode it will not be displayed changing the colour of the area starting with the pixel marked by the point in the edit mode The properties than can be configured from this control are Condition Here the condition that has to be met is specified so that the application paints the area with the chosen colour in the run mode
112. styles on the clipboard when the right button is pushed the context menu will not appear Push the New or Modify button and it will be possible to add or modify a style 20 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Modify style Fonts rial W Bold Italic Size 10 Orientation degrees 0 e Calor Sample Accept Cancel Mame Corresponds to the name of the style This name will uniquely identify the style there are no two styles with the same name Fonts correspond to the type of font used for the style Bold eic Corresponds to the style of the font Depending on the font selected you can choose bold and or italics Size 1 Corresponds to the size of the font The size can be between 1 and 90 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available Orientation degrees Corresponds to the orientation of the text The orientation expressed in degrees can be between 0 and 350 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available a Clicking on the button the style colour can be selected Basic colors HI 55m NNI EESTE Emi f f m umm mm Custom colors lt Hug 20 Red 255 m DS ColorlSolid Lum 120 Blue jo Define Custom Colors gt Cancel Add to Custom Colors Sample 123
113. ter ETT are ere er tent ere 219 10 3 2 2 Running an external 219 1 12 13 14 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 3 2 3 ro Tc 220 10 3 2 4 SOW AAEN ICC eT M 220 10 3 2 5 SHOW T LU T 220 20 SOWA TCP ON 220 10 3 2 7 220 EVENT VARIABLES 221 DDE DYNAMIC DATA 222 ACCESS THROUGH THE POWERSTUDIO CLIENT ccccsssssssssssssccccssssssscscsssssssssssssoccees 223 WEB SER VER cnius santas ener tanta an tanec 223 Cri Tr HR head 226 Jus tamus iN 227 1922729 E 228 E27 LOODA ate 230 1224 client GP PC AON 231 12 2 4 1 1 1 1 Displaying SCADA 234 229 Sot UD PE 235 L2 2 0 DPA vnete Of
114. the copy of groups clicking the CTRL key before releasing the left mouse button 0 This will only be active if there are devices selected from the device list On clicking the button the devices selected will be deleted from the corresponding group 2 2 3 Discriminators Enables discriminators to be added modified or deleted 19 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada The configuration of discriminators will be explained at length in chapter 5 of this manual Discriminators 2 2 4 Calculated variables Enables variables to be calculated changed or deleted The configuration of calculated variables will be explained at length in chapter 6 Calculated Variables 2 2 5 Styles This option can be used to add modify or delete font styles used to show the values on the different SCADA screens and reports Each one of the styles will be made up of a colour and a font format Styles configuration Styles Anal Times New Roman Normal al New a Modify gi Delete cig Exit Clicking the right button on the mouse over the list of styles the following contextual message will appear Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl This will enable styles to be pasted and copied It may be possible that some of the options from the context menu do not appear copy will only appear if there is a style selected and the paste option only if the styles have been copied onto the clipboard If no style is selected or there are no
115. the MODBUSTCP connection This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC 96 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada configuration Device Information Transformation ratio Peripheral number Model 3 RED 420 1 scale Low Identifier Version Primary Secundary 2 E413 Voltage 1 r 1 Description Current 10000 CWM Maximeter 7 Energy counters Period Tariff 1 1 Active energy 431 9441 1 Inductive energy Window type Sliding Capacitive energy Active energy Unit Active power Capacitive energy MM aximeber reset 4 Load values in device meters Alarms Variable Maximum Miniman Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 vj 240 200 0 Maximum Minimum Delay Alam2 Voltage L2 0250 190 0 r Analog outputs Variable Zen Fullscale Output 1 Voltage L1 vj gt E 500 20 m W Accept Device Information Peripheral number Model 2 CV M K4 RED 420 1 Identifier Version CVM K 2 E413 Description CVM Shows general information Transformation ratio Scale Low Primary Secundary Voltage Current 1 00
116. the appearance of the client application to be changed Skin e About Allows access to information about the client application N B There is a possibility of hiding the menu bar using the option Enable menu and toolbar in the Preferences option of the engine editor In this case it will not be possible for it to appear again from the client application 229 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 3 Toolbar The toolbar allows the user more direct access to the most important options at all times o Previous o Hext F LJ Devices Screens Reports ge Graph Table gt Events Properties A Print Toolbar Thus this bar offers the following options Previous Allows us to access the previous view Next Allows us to access the next view Down Arrow Allows us direct access any logged view Devices Allows direct access to the monitoring device view of a particular device through the device tree Screens Allows direct access to one of the SCADA screens defined by the user in the engine editor in the edit mode Reports Allows direct access to one of the user defined reports on the engine editor in the edit mode Graph Lets us make a graph Table Lets us make a table Events Gives access to the historical events view Properties Gives access to the properties window of the current view Print Allows us to print the current view It is possible to configure the buttons we want to be visible or not through the c
117. the audible alarm consists of a series of consecutive beeps that last while attempts to connect to the engine are unsuccessful The option Events actions lets us define what type of actions can be made on the client application and which cannot in response to enabling disabling or notification of events View changes may or may not be made or sound messages or external applications may or may not be executed v Connect Sound message HM Execution of extern Application Menu event actions The option of Connect indicates to the client application which server they must connect to By clicking on this option the following window will appear TCPAP address 192 168 5 52 Connection window to a server As shown in this window we can show the IP address of the server we want to connect to and the port as well The IP address can be numerical as in the example above XXX XXX XXX XXX the web address directly www midireccion com If we accept the client application verifies that the data entered is syntactically correct and tries to connect to the server using the specified address The previous connection will be lost because the client is always connected to a single server This option is not available when the client application is embedded in the website of the application as an Applet since this only permits connections with the machine from where it has been downloaded 231 PowerStudio PowerS
118. the device maximeter goes to zero Energy counters Reset On clicking the button the energy counters on the device will return to zero 152 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 34 QNA 412 413 3 34 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options 412 Driver parameters Device parameters y Variable units Variable limits 3 34 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC QMA 417 configuration Device Infarmatian Password Peripheral number Enable password to read Enable password to write 0 Identifier 412 Description Configuration Capture period min 10 Primary voltage 1 Primary current 1 Primary neutral current 5 voltage v 230 Circuit Three phase C Aron ONA 412 Seral number 0354511023 Version 562 09 Secondary voltage 1 Secondary current 5 Secundario de corrente de neutra 5 frequency Hz 50 Connection Triangle 3 threads Star 4 threads 153 Password Repeat password Quality Measure point CIR 2 Overvoltage threshold 3 110 thre
119. the equipment to have the channel reclosures enabled or not Depending on whether the reclosures are enabled or not some of the channel configuration fields will be enabled or disabled Clicking on the Synchronize clock button the present PC time will be sent to the device Hysterisis for this channel in relay mode s Of hysteresis for the connection and disconnection of the channel configured in the relay mode Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Description Trip threshold 4 Detection mode Channel 1 04 p Malai Delay time s Number af reclosures 30 m wi w Y J Instantaneous 0 Operating mode Delay time OFF PESE elay time 3 Time between reclosing s Relay mode 0 4 of relay output Latch selection Type of time between reclosing Normally open with latch option t Normal t Normally closed Without latch option f Exponential Shows the channel configuration 61 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel3 Channel4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 3 As it is only possible to display the configuration of one channel at a time click on one of the channels to display the corresponding configuration Description FIC Alphanumeric type information where a brief description of the channel can be entered for easy identification of toroid Sen aes 21 Toroid type
120. the period of the data displayed can be configured There is a direct equivalence between the tables and graphs that is the same type of graph and table show the same values but in different formats and obviously with different configuration capacities This feature is used by the PowerStudio client to deduce what graph or table we want to carry out when on a graph or table display That is if we are displaying a chart and we click on the button of 280 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada the client table PowerStudio will deduce that we want to see the representation as a table of the variables represented in the graph and will immediately show this Similarly if we are viewing a table and we click on the graph button PowerStudio client will deduce that we want to see the graph of the variables shown on the table The operation of the toolbar is absolutely the same as the operation of the same bar on the graph view is possible to configure some aspects using the option of Properties from the table This option can be accessed through the menu Options submenu Properties or directly through the button Properties on the main toolbar Variable MAIN Voltage L1 v MAIN Voltage L2 v MAIN Voltage L3 MAIN THD d L1 96 Properties Window of the Table Through this window you can add new variables to the table in the same way as they are added to the graph by clicking on It is also possible to delete v
121. time In a SCADA screen if we are dealing with a condition nothing will appear and if we are dealing with a formula a dash appears until the value can start In a report if there is no data in this period and we cannot assess the condition of a conditional control nothing will be displayed and if we can not assess the definition the same will occur It may occur that when assessing the formula we come across an invalid operation such as the square root of a negative number or a zero division in this case a question mark appears on the SCADA screen and the report will show the definition of the formula If we are unable to assess the condition of a conditional nothing will be displayed It may not be possible to represent the assessment of the formula of an expression either because the control configuration that contains it or because the assessment returned an out of range value In this case the following character will appear 321 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 6 An event is not behaving as expected What is happening When an event does not occur when you think it should or vice versa check that this condition can be fulfilled and make sure the event is enabled at some time by the calendar and that the condition can be fulfilled during that interval Verify that the devices involved in assessing the condition of the event communicate and make sure the program is in the run mode Make sure you have per
122. v 0 0 0 This section shows the configuration of the device relay output and the option to configure it with the values desired is given For CVM MINI devices the two relay outputs of these devices can be configured e Variable The parameters associated with the relay are indicated in this field The output is programmed as an alarm or energy pulse with any of the parameters measured by the device being able to be controlled The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are indicated in brackets e Max In this box the maximum value to control is indicated If an energy variable is selected the value of each pulse will be indicated This will be displayed as follows Alarm Variable kwh pulse 1 Active energy III EMH 0 e Min In this box the minimum value to control is indicated If you select an energy variable this field will remain disabled e Delay Alarm delay in seconds The maximum value is 9999 seconds This field will remain deactivated ifan energy variable is chosen 117 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 23 CVM R8 Communication will not be possible with the CVM R8 through a MODBUSTCP connection 3 23 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options Driver parameters Device parameters Analogue inputs outputs Variable limits 3 23 1 1 Device parameters In the case of CVM R8 it will not be possible to configure any parameters of the
123. voltage programming The product value between primary value and primary current has to be equal or less than 20 000 000 The primary value depending on full scale must be between 1 and the value of the following table Maximum value 110v 99 999 275 70 000 300v 70 000 500V 40 000 e Current transformation ratio This is the primary current value device possesses The value can be between 1 and 10 000 A The secondary current is 5A on the CVM 144 M aximeter Period 5 LI rit Active power e Period Is the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power lll apparent power current Ill or phase current depending on the device e Maximeter reset When the button is enabled the device maximeter goes to zero Distortion calculation THD Effective value fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion that the device will calculate can be configured Energy counters Reset 121 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada On clicking the button the energy counters on the device will return to zero 122 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 25 DH 96 3 25 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options DH96 Driver parameters Variable units Device parameters Device inputs Variable limits T
124. you click the button 1848 Forward Back These tools will allow us to move around the different pages on which the report is composed if any Pagel Using this control will directly show a page of the report without having to progress page by page with the tools described above Clicking the control will open up a list of pages available for the report which is active at the moment 7 2 4 Zoom tools Zoom in Zoom out Using these tools you can zoom in or out from the image that is currently defined for the display of the report sheet This control will serve to indicate a specific zoom to implement on the report sheet The values range from 50 to 100096 You can also configure on the Adjusted mode which would adapt the zoom to the report sheet being displayed to appear as large as possible given the screen resolution where the program is running 191 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 2 5 Miscellaneous tools Configure formulas Using this tool formulas can be defined which may be applied or reference can be made to them or any of the report pages for which they have been defined The following window will appear when the button is clicked Formula management E3 Formulae Fe Add S Modify E 28 322088 x Delete Accept 3 Cancel Clicking the right button of the mouse over the list of formulas the following contextual message will appear Cur Copy Ctrl C P
125. 00 Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The value of the primary voltage should be between 1 and 500000 V and the secondary between 1 and 999 V In addition the primary divided by the secondary must be less than 9090 Primary of the current transformer This is the primary current value the device has The value can be between 1 and 10 000 A The secondary current is 5A in the CVM K M aximeter Periad 1 Window type Sliding Unit Active power x Maximeter reset 97 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada e Period Is the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes e Type of window Type of window used to save the maximeter value it can be fixed or sliding Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power lll apparent power 11 or current 111 e Maximeter reset When the button is enabled the device maximeter goes to zero Energy counters Tariff 1 Active energy 4319441 O B EE Inductive energy oO a Oo Capacitive energy 34491 Bee S Active energy Inductive energy oO Oo Capacitive energy Load values in device meters This part of the configuration corresponds to device energy Depending on the type of device some or all of the fields can be deactivated If the selector is checked on sending the configuration the energy counter will be loaded with the values entered into t
126. 00 73 100 83 7 30 08 7 00 00 AM 100 79 100 93 7 30 08 8 00 00 AM 100 94 101 13 7 30 08 12 39 47 PM 790 7130 08 12 39 47 PM 800 151 11 26 110 ms Vm 35 48 Va 90 30 3 11 26 30 ms Vm 40 18 Va 96 34 7 30 08 12 39 47 PM 820 0 00 1 21 910 ms Vm 0 00 Va 11 86 7 30 08 12 39 47 PM 830 3 0 00 1 21 900 ms Vm 0 00 Va 11 26 7 30 08 12 38 47 PM 910 0 00 1 21 810 ms Vm 0 00 Va 11 26 7 30 08 12 41 09 PM 720 3 30 64 20 ms Vm 54 06 Va 0 15 7 30 08 12 41 09 PM 730 4 68 20 10 ms Vm 68 20 Va 0 78 4 59 48 10 ms Vm 59 48 Va 0 40 7 30 08 1 00 00 PM 7 30 08 2 00 00 PM 7 30 08 3 00 00 PM 7 30 08 8 00 00 PM 7 30 08 9 00 00 PM 7 30 08 10 00 00 PM 7 30 08 11 00 00 PM 7 31 08 12 00 00 AM 7 31 08 1 00 00 AM 7 31 08 2 00 00 AM 7 31 08 3 00 00 AM Back 1 Goto fj Groupedby 2 Period Server powerstudio cir cutor com 80 Table of historic events The duration table shows a list where the first column contains the duration of the events in the interval shown Apart from the length in itself it shows the number of events of the interval with this duration irrespective of the phase In each column of each variable a number of events from that phase is indicated and between brackets the value of the event if there is more than one event in this phase with this duration th
127. 2 04 59 02 Error del CVM Harm nicos CVM Armonicos STATUS IZ1 amp amp secondo lt 5 lt not applied gt 3s lunes 22 04 59 27 jel primer evento cumpli la condicion trunc rand 3000 1 3000 3h 28m 42s 15 22 05 00 00 Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante 3h 28m 8s 2m 0s 1 o Back Next 12 Goto Grouped by 39 croup Qi event Aaa up Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Table of logged events This table has two different viewing modes the normal mode and the total mode The normal mode above table consists of five columns e Date and time Indicates the date and time at which the incident occurred e Name Name of event that occurred e Annotation Description of the event that occurred which may have data relating thereto or the execution environment at the time it occurred e Recognized in Time taken for the event to be acknowledged whether or not it is finally acknowledged Leaving the mouse cursor on the cell a tooltip will appear with the date on which the event was recognized e Deactivated on Time the event took in disabling if it actually was disabled Leaving the mouse cursor on the cell a tooltip will appear with the date on which the event was deactivated if the event existed As a standard table the table of active events shows a time interval You may move through these intervals or modify them through the toolbar and the first
128. 2 3 Anonymous User There is a special type of user that from now will be known as anonymous user The main difference between this type of user and the other users is that they do not have a name or a password The anonymous user can access the application resource to which they have access without having to enter a name and a password To avoid non authorised access this user can be disabled to have greater control over those who can access the resources and those who cannot Setup authentification os Profiles 5 Users user v Activate anonymous user Profiles 59 profile x Remove profile ew Accept 3 Cancel Enabling or disabling the Activate anonymous user option will activate or not the option to permit the anonymous user by way of the Java Client The list will show the profiles assigned to the anonymous user with the Aad profile and Delete profile buttons working the same as those of any other user see section 2 2 12 2 2 Users 34 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 2 13 Operating mode There are two possible operating modes edit and run In the run mode the Java Client allows you to communicate with the PowerStudio engine to view the values of the devices make charts and tables of the data saved display SCADA screens and reports and perform other functions not involving the modification of the configuration in general software terms or individually for each device
129. 3 gt Overvoltage endForced Mark if the event has finished correctly F or has be forced to finalise T semicycleVoltage Each of the points that make up the semi circular effective voltage associated with the event This field is optional and may not exist date Date and time DDMMAAAAHHMMSSUUU value Value 320 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4F A Q 14 4 1 None of the equipment communicates What is happening Make sure your computer is switched on and in a mode which can communicate ensuring particularly that it is not in the set up or starting up mode Make sure your computer is connected to a PC or a compatible converter and that the wiring is correct Make sure there is no possibility of any interference in the cable run from the device to the PC or between the device and the converter If you are connected to a converter check that the latter is properly connected to the PC Verify that the grid is not overloaded with an excessive amount of devices If your computer is connected by way of a 232 485 converter make sure that the switches are in the correct position Make sure that the equipment bus does not have devices that communicate at different speeds or have the same device number Check that the PC port is working properly 14 4 2 A TCP2RS converter does not communicate What is happening Make sure your computer is switched on and connected to the communications network Make sure there is no possibility of
130. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Harmonic TA Back 12 Go to Q Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 Harmonics graph This type of graph has some special features 275 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Subtitle In the caption under the title of the graph indicating the date to which the harmonic decomposition being viewed belongs to X axis The X axis does not represent time but the harmonic number It therefore lacks units Toolbar The toolbar contains only 3 buttons that will allow us to move to other records namely it will enable us to move to earlier records to the following ones or go directly to the records closest to a date specified by the user Go to option Properties The configurable properties of this type of graph are the same as with a standard graph the only difference being that only variables from equipment containing this type of variable are available Representation using bars As a special feature this adopts bars as a default representation but these can be set up afterwards Another special feature graph is the waveform graph generated by QNA equipment which can provide a screenshot of the voltage waveform and the current in each one of the phases The characteristics of this graph are very similar to the harmonics graph The only differences are that the X axis units are milliseconds and tha
131. 8 23 04 070 231 53 1231 30 7 12 08 8 23 04 080 231 60 231 38 7 12 08 8 23 04 090 231 50 231 48 7 12 08 8 23 04 100 231 68 231 61 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 110 231 60 231 48 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 120 231 50 231 33 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 130 231 66 231 46 7 12 08 8 23 04 PM 140 231 71 231 56 712 08 8 23 04 PM 150 231 66 231 53 712 08 8 23 04 PM 160 231 53 231 41 a a Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 Efficient semi circle voltage table As shown in the title of the table the data concerns the event that the screen shot belongs to namely the date of the event the type the duration the value the average voltage of the event and the previous voltage 284 12 2 10 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Displaying logged events Another important client tool is the possibility creating tables where information about past events is shown To access this view we can do it through the menu option Views and then Events and finally Event browser or directly from the Events button on the toolbar A table of events from a SCADA screen can be created where the event display control can be added V Historic events Week 39 22 septiembre 2008 28 septiembre 2008 PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous Date and time Devices Screens Reports 24 Graph Table Events Week 39 22 septiembre 2008
132. 9 SLT parade tels aiios tetuer bct to 69 SCV M BE o iet timeant ie fo tase ea rte E 92 SW MEE vade uID 92 3 18 1 1 Device paramet o s aa RD RN DUUM 92 NER cM Mu MI RM D M 95 III COnnectonWwiulModbus delen et edes wa io atus erased text 95 aes 96 3 19 2 1 Device paramet Sirena esac 96 T 99 2 20 une la tias 99 3 20 1 1 Device parane el 836005 dapi ae rust e 99 S20 1 2 Expansion CATS dice nandi Pret ai enc 105 2420 12 3hpUt OU pul 32 94 2 5 6008290 25926 82 8 04 00 96900 5 000 80 0020926041521 105 2 20 222 Analosuc puts 108 3 20 1 2 3 4 digital outputs 4 analogue 110 BIN er go oer I UNE DLE Meo UD egret or ar ar CM reer M LM 111 RC 112 Sf CORDECHORHTuMOdDUS 112 SZ 112 22 1
133. AMX3Ty MDAMXTy CVM K2 p O __ 0O All maximum demand variables can be discriminated 300 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 7 Harmonics x 1 15 x 1 15 x 16 50 ARMxV1 X UOVMISHAR x x x X X uec sn c i s SX c GY X CVM NRG 96 X X EE CN Neutral ARMXxA1 2 144 3n spo ee X X X X X CVM NRG 96 Maximum voltage harmonics 3 sec ARMyMXCV1 y 1 50 ARMyMXCV2 y 1 50 y 1 50 Ooo O S 99 OE Maximum voltage harmonics 10 mins ARMyMXPV1 y 1 50 ARMyMXPV2 y 1 50 y 1 50 5 9 o 14 1 8 Pst Pst CVM K2 poo cu uuo uw Pst Input x x 1 20 PST1DIx PST2DIx PST3DIx 2 L ug p 9 6 s 301 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 9 Inputs and outputs DIx O O O PCVMRE E _ O O OK n TCP50 ALARM x X X 1 19191 1 19191 L Oey Ne wm o 9 x l1 1 NOU NN DNE NEM The analogue input of the CVM MINI devices will correspond to the temperature variable measured
134. DA screens defined and designed in the engine editor both local and remote You can display any SCADA screen defined using the menu option Overviews and then Screens or directly from the Screens button on the toolbar However when the client application connects to a server the client will automatically show the initial screen defined by the user on the server or if this is not specified the first SCADA screen from the list of defined screens SCADA screens basically consist of a background image which may or may not exist and is therefore white and a series of controls placed on them The information provided by a SCADA screen is updated on an ongoing basis It acts on the basis of two main types of controls those displaying some kind of data and those which require or allow user intervention The display controls simply show information on the screen There are various types of information which may or may not vary over time depending on the type of control For example a formula varies over time depending on the values of the variables that make it up and conversely a static image is always fixed Display controls are Text control Image control Date Control Formula control Floodfill Control Conditioned control Dynamic image control To ascertain the scope and detailed operation of these controls see the editing SCADA screens section Action controls allow the user to operate them by clicking on them It is easy to know w
135. E xX OX o OX gt lt 12 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada a i5 a nO o9 5 5 M 14 vF E p D E E CN CN N O0 CN Y 0 co A A e J p N O O O lt iD 2 D D gt E Fo 2 gt gt 8 2 9 2 LX x EMEN eee xX xX X X X X X X RENE NEN CNN POWERNET OX X X xX x QNA 412 OX o X J p NEN QNA 413 X J NEN RGU 10 X X X X X X X X RRM C x x x X x Downloading data using IEC 870 5 102 is not recommended when the communication protocol is Modbus TCP Restricted to reading values Configuration is not possible Depending on the generic converter used communication errors may be produced with other devices To learn how to configure the generic converters see the corresponding manual It is possible to move the second level devices to a first level device different to that previously added by following these steps Select devices to be moved by clicking the left mouse button ET Factory TCP2H5 7 Serial Port 1 R5232 485 Without releasing the left mouse button drag the cursor to the first level device to where we want to move the selected devices Finally release the left mouse button for the change to take place La Factory Gas 2 96 E Serial 1 R5232 485 8g Gas 3 CVM
136. First save the images that make up the animation using the image manager Suppose your animation consists of a sequence of 3 images Assume further that we want our animation to change every second Therefore we will have to create a list of formulae on the SCADA screen which will return module 3 of the second function which will vary between the values O 1 and 2 The function is as follows mod second 3 Suppose we call this function MOD Now we can define a conditional control with 3 conditions where each condition displays one of the images that form the animation The following shows control properties Condition MOD MOD MOD 2 LA Remove Condition Falsa MOD ye Control type Image Search for image Maintain aspect ratio Alignment e The result is that one of the images make up the animation is shown every second can be seen there are many combinations to be carried out and a large variety of opportunities to exploit using this technique 327 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 18 How can simulate a level control There are two ways to do a level control on a SCADA screen The first one is to use a conditional control where each control is an image with a different level and where every condition indicates what should be fulfilled to reach this level Here are some images showing us specific examples with its conditions CVM
137. For the selection of the different days that make up the week the previously configured Daily types are used Annual The disable zones are configured by a calendar As with Weekly type the days are selected from the previously configured Daily types Clicking the right mouse button on the list of timetables the context menu will appear Copy Paste Ckrl v allowing timetables to be copied or pasted It is possible that some of the options in the context menu do not appear copy will only appear on the list if a timetable is selected and the paste option only if calendars have been copied previously to the clipboard If there are no timetables selected on the clipboard on clicking the right mouse button the context menu will not appear On clicking the Add button the following dialogue box will appear 206 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Add new timetable Select the new timetable type Weekly Annual x Cancel Where the type of timetable you want to add is selected Once added the type of timetable can not be changed that is if one adds a Daily type when you click the Modify button the Daily type will be modified and in no case can the Weekly or Annual type be changed 10 1 1 Daily This type of timetable corresponds to a day In events that have a daily type selected the disablement slots shall be the same for all days Add timetable Mame Business day E Calor Time slots Repre
138. HEVQ1 HEVQ2 EEE EEE ee GUENEEENS 306 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 11 9 RGU 10 RGU 10 RA Status Leakage current ws B Pre alarm trigger Latching Coil triggering 1 OT 1 ST 7 a AELD RGU 10 E Xu Jr we dp c o cu eee X p RGU 10 RA plc No of reclosures X Notenabled o O0 L Notlatted o o 1 1 O0 Latched 1 Coil trigger output status Value Not Tripped Tripped 1 Value 7 10 11 Calibration mode To carry out a channel reset on the RGU 10 devices the RST variable must be forced to value 0 To carry out a remote triggering of the channel the RST variable should be forced to the value 1 14 1 11 10RRM C X Connected O0 Communication trigger 8 10 On RRM C devices the status of the devices can be forced to 16 to reset it or 17 for the external device trigger 307 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 12 Graph variables and special tables Special variables for graphs and tables serve to indicate to PowerStudio that we want to make a graph or non standard table On a non standard graph or table the values that appear in the X and Y axis rows and columns on a table may switch from one type to another depending on the variables represented For a better understanding of these graphs and tables see the section on the java client When you want to m
139. I EE ES tg EVEL EL ZR m m a i 1 a Cancel 167 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 5 Discriminators PowerStudio provides a complete set of tools that allow the definition of energy discriminators as well as further analysis and study on the data collected by the devices in both a powerful and intuitive manner A discriminator study provides a consistent result in an energy consumption representation for each type of hour counter defined at any moment This representation can be displayed either as a table or graph Similarly it is possible to study this data displaying it at different time intervals or grouping it together in different periods Therefore we can see them in periods of a year and grouped together by months in monthly intervals and grouped together by days etc As can be seen the discriminator studies consist basically of defining the discriminators typically a calendar and applying said discriminator to the data stored in a device Therefore a representation of the study realised can be obtained as the user desires and visible both in graph and table format 5 1 Discriminator configuration The first stage that is carried out is the configuration of the discriminators we want to apply to the data for analysis The user can add new discriminators and delete or modify the existing discriminators To manage these actions the option Discriminators should be selected
140. IR CONDITIONING 2 MKD OUTDOORS LIGHTING iJ VIRTUAL SUB PANEL AIR CONDITIONING MAIN i OFFICES r iL satups 7 WAREHOUSE i TEMPERATURES i WORKSHOP Device tree according to the organization defined by the user You can also access the display screen of a particular device from a SCADA screen where a control device has been added A device display screen can have multiple aspects Devices mainly define two types of screens one analogue and one text numerical The analogue view presents most of the values in maximum minimum and present bars while the current view of the text presents them in the text form and organized in different ways usually in tabs 241 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada A common element on all the display screens is that there are numerical values for the variables which refresh in real time and can be selected to be used when making graphs or historical graphs trends Another common element is that on most displays there is an upper bar specifying the status of the device and the name and the date on which the values displayed were read CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada Options Views General O Previous v g Devices Screens Reports e Graph Table gt Events ee Properties CVM1 44 Izquierda 9 18 08 10 12 35 AM w Instantaneous Maximums Minimums ll Harmonics L1 L2 L3 Ii L1 L2 L3 Voltage Power Phase neutral V 2256 2215 221 5 eee ae M
141. It is possible to have the same device in different groups similarly groups can also be grouped Define groups Group 1 1 group devices H Group 1 c ETT 1 Group 1 2 1 Group 13 Group 2 1 Group 2 1 1 Group 2 2 Add group te Delete group gt Add device 27 Delete device Accept Cancel The left part of the dialogue corresponds to the defined groups The tree structure with son and father nodes will facilitate the display of the dependency between groups 2 This is the root group of the tree When new devices are added these are added automatically to this root group __ Clicking will add the group as son of the selected group father Only the of the group must be entered in the new group created i i Group 1 1 Group 1 1 Group 1 2 Mew group 1 Group 1 3 Group 2 1 Group 2 1 1 Group 2 2 If we then want to change the name of a group at a later stage select the group and then click on the name with the left mouse button Within the same father group the names of the son groups cannot be repeated but it is possible to repeat the names of the groups in father groups __0 Deegoup Clicking will delete the selected group as well as all the son groups It will be possible to delete any group except root group It is also possible to add or delete groups clicking the right button of the mouse on the node you want to add a s
142. K If it is not possible to move the device to the desired first level device either because communication is not permitted or second level devices can not be connected or there is an inconsistency between devices the cursor will change toy to signal that the operation is not permitted Gas 3 13 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 2 1 1 Adding a First level Device Depending on the type of device you want to add the device screen can vary The typical first level device configuration screen is displayed below however depending on the device you want to add some parameters do not exist or specific parameters for the device should be configured The special parameters for each first level device will be dealt with in detail in the section dealing with the device Mew 285 Mame Description ee Converter address Port Configuration port 10001 30718 O d Soup cr Advanced setup Accept Zx Cancel In which Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the same name Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device Converter address Corresponds to the address through which the program can communicate with the device This parameter can be an IP address or a name This address should not be confused with the MAC address e Port Corresponds to the communication port
143. L Communication error Shown when communication is not possible with at least one of the devices Edit mode Shown to indicate that the programme is editing NO About Shows information on the software 40 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 Devices 3 1 Drivers Option Configuration The options of a device can be accessed from e See Menu See section 2 4 3 Display Options Toolbar See section 2 4 4 Toolbar The options menu for a CVM 96 device will be the following Options Driver parameters Device parameters 5 A E Variable units Variable limits In this section those options which are common to all or the majority of the drivers are described These options are described using device CVM 96 as an example It is possible that other devices need to configure other types of option not described in this section in which case detailed explanation will be contained in the corresponding device section 3 1 1 Driver Parameters CVM 96 configuration Representation f Analog Database Capture period min 1 5 v Save data in directory as default Default discriminator E None gt From this screen we can configure the type of display of the variables on screen and configure where to save the data files There are two types of data representation 41 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Analog E WE E Text Analogue repre
144. L M I E 149 R er DA 151 SS SN ADV EP ONIONS NETT m 151 3 33 1 1 Device paramet EAN 151 MEL OIN URS MM 153 SELL EMEN DII IPAE UTD 153 3 34 1 1 Device Da He ECTS testes bp Ende Estes E orate 153 3 95 JRGIDETO E ROIUSTO Run Iota 156 O ELTE SET 156 3 35 1 1 Device LOLS rr EE E E Et 156 IDLH RGU a 156 2992 ROIO RA E DM N 158 DID ADISPIGVING 160 2 95 ROO UH ute 160 E A E boda en Dae 161 C o 162 DUO RLVEFSODIUONS Ee Bea 162 S302 DMAP VAUS E 162 ST e ee at ao dee eod deut petet imet 163 bora MEEC D GIU RID Eo 163 3 97 1 DEVICE Palace Lets 163 WDE P 164 3 952 164 VARIABLE SELECTION N 165 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada oO fea 168 5 1 DISCRIMINATOR CONFIGURATION
145. L button and without releasing the left mouse button the cursor will change to indicating that a copy will take place of the group 1 Energy General screens 1 Secondary screens 1 Secondary screens Secondary screens 1 1 Switch If you want to drag a group where it is not possible to copy or move it the cursor will change to to indicate that the action is not permitted The right side of the dialogue is formed by a list of images which belong to the group selected from the tree Add image Oo hame Clicking here will bring up a dialogue that allows you to select an image stored on the PC for later use in SCADA screens or reports PowerStudio will create a copy of the image and will work with the copy at no time will PowerStudio use the original image selected The images that can be added should have a maximum size of 2 Mbytes and a maximum resolution of 2048x2048 pixels 24 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Likewise once images have been added to a group they can be easily copied or changed by clicking the left mouse button on one of those selected 5 0 2 7 Energy General screens 1 Secondary screens 1 Ed 3 UNIFIL UNIFIL3 econdary screens 1 Switch UNIFIL LMIFIL2 UNIFILS 01 Switch UNIFIL2 o TER screens cl Secondary screens 1 i Secondary screens LIMIFILZ i Secondary screens 1 1 Switch If you want to copy i
146. L2 L3 m Tarffy y1 3 OVI OY CVMBBD J TT o j J O0 CVMBCO J o ee OO CvMNRG9 o O CVMSP ou POWERNET 0 JO O O oO Maximum demand generated Instantaneous Maximum L1 L2 L3 m Tarffy y 1 3 L1 L2 L3 M _ Tariff y y 1 3 Maximum demand of apparent power CVM NRG 96 Consumed Generated Instantaneous Maximum Instantaneous Maximum Tariff y Tariff y Tariff y Tariff y MDVAI 9 MDVAMX MENTA 9 NMDVAI 9 NMDVAMX READ 9 ER NMA eo X CVM K2 __ X O Maximum demand of active power Consumed Generated Instantaneous Maximum Instantaneous Maximum Tariff y Tariff y Tariff y Tariff y MDAPI RE 9 MDAPMX RM 9 NMDAPI 9 1 9 CELL em X CVM K2 a ae ae d Maximum current demand Instantaneous Maximum is o e Rel ee _ eos 301 I A MAT m oo OUT OS _o CVM K2 Maximum current demand Tariff y y 1 9 Instantaneous Maximum 3e I i i MDAMTy MDAI2Ty MDAI3Ty MDAITy MDAMXTTy 2 MD
147. M 10 00 PM Sep 17 2008 Date Next 12 Goto d Grouped by 4 Period e Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 9 23 08 10 30 57 AM Request to force variables sent Zooming in with a graph with several areas of representation selected the first zone This behaviour is defined by default giving priority to conserving the same X axis in all areas it is usually useful to compare values with the same dates or intervals and therefore does not apply if the X axes are different and is only included in the enlargement of those areas with similar X axes although they are not consecutive Note that when the enlargement is carried out in more than one area all the new selections are horizontal The behaviour of Zoom mode can be changed by varying the idea previously discussed using the Control or Shift keys while selecting the new display window The Control key forces the selection to include only the area where the enlargement is being made therefore if the graph consists of a single area this modifier has no effect If the enlargement is being made between two different areas one corner of the new window is in one area and the other in a different area This forces only the areas between the two to be included For example if we start the enlargement in the first area and finish in the second only these two areas and not the third will be enlarged A curious effect caused by this mode is that areas with different X axes c
148. Nominal voltage L3 96 Vn 1 2 E 4 Jul 2008 Back next 12 Go to fi Grouped by 5 Period Server Ok powerstudio cir cutor com 80 Graph of logged events This figure is essentially equivalent to a standard graph with all the characteristics of one The only difference is that each event is depicted as a dot plus a horizontal line whose length equals the duration of the event represented Usually the values of events this graph shows are accompanied by nominal voltage In both cases the units are expressed as a percentage of the nominal value Any other standard variable may also be added The last special type of graph is the semi circular effective voltage graph 278 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada b Graph QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER6 3 08 2 50 31 PM 400 PowerStudio Scada n Em Dd Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens Reports pe Graph Table gt Events Dx Properties 2 Print QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER 6 3 08 2 50 31 PM 400 Events Semicycle effective voltage L1 V Events Semicycle effective voltage L2 V Events Semicycle effective voltage L3 V ee 6 3 08 2 50 31 400 6 3 08 2 50 31 750 2 50 31 PM 300 2 50 31 PM 400 2 50 31 PM 500 2 50 31 PM 600 2 50 31 PM 700 2 50 31 PM 800 2 50 31 PM 900 Jun 3 2008 Date o Back o Next 72 Goto O Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 bh Semi circular effective voltage graph This type of graph re
149. RER T 29 HSC 30 22422 EE T E 30 SCT cer 22 2 2 h2 2 9 JANIDOBSTDIOUS SET erage Quince 34 2 2113 cee MM 35 poor Sees centena dut ropa Cet eds 36 2 0 d c 36 2 9 2 COD T 36 2 3 3 Paste xc e UN eet 36 2 3 4 36 2 3 ATIS AU ERN 36 2 4 SEEME NU ati rr E EN 37 2 4 1 TR 37 2 4 2 ECCS 37 2 4 3 39 2 4 4 TPO I stet 39 2 4 5 USD 40 2 4 6 C 40 Perrier mre er rT Dy e u n 41 3 1 DRIVERS OPTION CONFIGURATION etinm A tis steel uu qp uaa d 4 3 1 1 Driver Fame e TS ics m teu Ms Mae odi asinis 41 Jules VARADE D RIS eoa e eee ORO ORO 43 3 1 3 Variable ds
150. This option can be accessed from the Options menu or from the button Properties from the toolbar This option will be disabled for those devices that only have one possible view vi 23 1 2 24 2 Text W3 237 View selection of a device The information about the devices does not only show the numerical values or bars organized into tabs boxes rows and or columns but can also appear in other forms depending on the type of device in question A typical way to represent the information would be graphically through descriptive images of the status of a variable or set of variables 244 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Previous Next v Devices Screens Reports P Graph Table Events Properties Print RRM C 9 19 08 12 52 03 PM Status Reclosing meter Number of reclosures Time between reclosings s Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Displaying an RRM C with an image representing the status of the relay POWER FACTOR REGULATOR PowerStudio Scada Options Views Q Previous General Next Devices Screens Reports P Graph H Table Events Properties Print POWER FACTOR REGULATOR 9 19 08 12 56 18 PM r Variables Current Cosine Phi Total distortion 96 Energy quadrant Consumed r Digital outputs 1 e 000 0 2 3 4 5 6 Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80
151. To carry out this adjustment the Control key should be pushed and with the left hand mouse button the different controls will be selected to be re sized The last control selected will be that which is taken as a reference to carry out the re sizing of the others i e all the selected controls will end up with the horizontal size the same as the last control selected I1 Vertically re size This tool carries out the same function as the horizontal re sizing but with reference to the vertical size of the last control selected Re size vertically and horizontally This tool will simultaneously re size horizontally and vertically IH Redistribute space horizontally At least three controls should have been selected so this tool can be used The horizontal position of the selected control can be adjusted so that the same distance exists between them l e that the controls to which this tool has been applied will each have the same distance at the sides left and right 1 Re distribute space vertically This tool carries out the same function as the horizontal space redistribution but with reference to the vertical re distribution 2 Align to the left At least two controls should have been selected so this tool can be used The control enables the position to be aligned to the level of the part furthest to the left of the other To carry out this adjustment the Control key should be pushed and with the left hand mouse button the dif
152. a New device Measure is CIR WAT T EI EN M MINI LV M NRG3SB Pratectian FEET TT ur 4 fe al fom 8 89 RS LBS 8 8 Inputs Outputs Quality mmm e 412 NA 413 Generic MODBUS Left click on the device you want to add to the program configuration iw Check if the devicer is working when added The option Check if the device works when added indicates to the software that when added the connection should be verified and will give the error message if the device is not working correctly or is absent If when adding a device this check is not required either because it has not been installed yet or for any other reason this option should be deselected is possible that while devices are being added or altered communication with such devices may not be possible if the configured speed is different to the connection speed but communication will be possible once the software finalises the speed configuration process Below is a table showing the possible combinations between different devices with first level devices shown in the columns and the possible second level devices that can be connected to them in the rows TCP2RS Modbus TCP TCP2RS QNA RS485 LM50 TCP Modbus TCP Generis ModubsTCP C 14d O D O H LO HEINE D c eed I e LO A O LX EE CEN EX I j NE GE CENE
153. a list of typical mathematical functions which can be entered into the formula being edited 313 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Function to add in the expression Functions o Add other symbols this option allows us to enter symbols such as comparators logical functions basic symbols specific mathematical numbers and so on Addition of other symbols assistance Decimals 3 Cancel Depending on whether what we are creating corresponds to an expression or a condition some of these symbols will be disabled and therefore may not be selected 314 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 3 XML Services PowerStudio provides a range of XML services to enable in some respects communication with other applications In petitions where it is necessary to express a date and time both in service petitions and the data from the response these will be represented in UTC Universal Coordinated Time with the format DDMMAAAAHHMMSS two digits for the day two for the month four for the year and two for the hour minutes and seconds It will also be possible represent only a date as DDMMAAAA assuming that the time is 00 00 00 or represent an hour as HHMMSS Finally in cases where milliseconds are required these are represented with three digits after the seconds DDMMAAAAHHMMSSUUU or HHMMSSUUU The petitions must follow the URI standard RFC 2396 so that the user of these petitions has to take into account this detail wh
154. a which enables the unique identification of the discriminator Description RoE Lue Alphanumeric type data which enables the user to enter a brief description of the discriminator Hour types Configures the different types of hours defined in the discriminator d s Bayi Configures the different types of days defined in the discriminator Configures the discriminator calendar 169 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 5 1 1 Types of hours Hour type management Hour type Dh Add P Madity oy Delete Accept Cancel Through this dialogue the different discriminator hour types may be added deleted or modified These types of hour are the basic elements of the definition of the discriminators Here the registered consumption is distributed in accordance with the calendar maximum energy and demand Typically the types of hours correspond to the various prices that can be applied to the energy consumed in accordance with the time zone or day When adding or modifying the following dialogue will appear Modify hour type Mame Valley ui Color Accept Cancel Where Mame Valley Alphanumeric type data which allows us to uniquely identify the type of hour within the tariff Colour that visually identifies the type of hour within the discriminator and will be used for the result graph of applying this discriminator to data stored by
155. ables of the device which will be part of it need to be chosen Thus when accessing the Graph option from the main menu or from the toolbar firstly a dialogue will appear that will allow us to select the device from which we want to choose the variables that will be part of the graph Ww Devices 0 192 168 1 52 CVM1 44 Izquierda e Ww Caja Vl Puerto serie 1 89 89 CVM Armonicos 3 Reus B e Ww PowerStudio Scada Alemania C1 Chicago Pedraforca RGO Device selection screen 249 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Despite the fact that at first we can only choose variables from the same device to make the graph later we can add variables from other devices this will be explained later If we access the Graph option while we are in monitoring the view of a device the client application will understand that we want to make a graph of what is being displayed and will skip back to the previous screen According to the device chosen a screen will then appear to select the type of graph and the discriminator to be applied Discriminators Selection Screen choice for the type of graph and discriminator Note only certain types of graphs can be discriminated usually the standard type if the graph type chosen cannot be discriminated the Discriminator option will be disabled If a default discriminator has been defined for the equipment although a di
156. ake special graphs or tables such as the waveform or harmonics it will be necessary to use the following variables Voltage COMI o a a NES CONES es evm PP OWMK2 xXx X X HEC UND OO O Ek O O ARMMXCV2 Maximum voltage harmonics 10 mins ARMMXPV1 ARMMXPV2 ARMMXPV3 Billing closures 14 1 13 Status of devices Sometimes it will be necessary to know the status of a device for example when you want to activate an event when a device stops communicating To ascertain the status we use the STATUS variable name STATUS The following are the possible values that this status variable may have 308 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 14 Event Variables The event variables will be coded for use in formulas and expressions such as R EVE_variable name Using the R EVE prefix the program will ascertain that this is an event variable rather than a device variable The following is a table with the different variables associated with each event Identifier State of the event 0 off 1 Enabled TACT Time the event has been active the value is 0 when the event is disabled Counter ofthe number of activations CACT Counter of the number of activations CDIS Counter of the number of deactivation CACK Counter of the number of acknowledgments CTIM Of consultation period time that th
157. ally this amount of memory allocated by default is sufficient for running the programme But perhaps for very large tables this memory is insufficient For these cases it is possible to run the client application forcing the virtual machine to assign more memory to the program This is accomplished by running the program from the command line with a parameter indicating the maximum and minimum memory available for the program java Xm256m Xmx1024m jar AppletScada jar As you can see the parameters Xm and Xmx allocate a minimum and a maximum quantity to the program 326 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 16 How can simulate a control switch To simulate the behaviour of a switch e g to act on a digital output we need a conditional control and two controls to force the variable The control conditional would contain two images one with the representation of a switch open with the condition that the digital variable is 1 and another with the representation of a closed switch with the condition that the digital variable is 0 On Off Off A control is positioned on left part of the control to force a variable with a digital output value at 1 whilst another control is positioned on the right hand section to force a variable with the output value at 0 14 4 17 How doladd animation on the SCADA To add a small animated image the conditional control combined with the second function in the condition is added
158. alue Rated voltage Rated voltage of the equipment with a 3 wire configuration the composite voltage should be programmed and the single voltage on four wires If the measurement is carried out through voltage transformers the programmed value must refer to the secondary Nominal frequency Nominal frequency of the device Circuit Enables the type of circuit to which it is connected to carry out the measurement to be chosen whether it is connected to a three phase device or if it only uses two current connectors for the measurement Aron Connection Enables the type of connection to which it is connected to carry out the measurement to be chosen albeit delta connection between phases without neutral or star 3 phase connection and neutral 154 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Quality Measure point Commentary ICIR 2 ICIRCONTROL QMA2 Overvoltage threshold Overvoltage hysteresis 1 10 2 Sag threshold Sag hysteresis 90 2 Interruption threshold Interruption hysteresis n Measurement point Brief description of the measurement point where the is situated Comments Brief description of the measurement point Overvoltage threshold Serves to programme the overvoltage percentage Each semi cycle with an efficient value exceeding this value will be understood as over voltage Overvoltage hysteresis Overvoltage hysteresis is where the start up voltage is different from the end voltage of
159. ame name e Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device e Converter address Corresponds to the address through which the program can communicate with the device This parameter can be an IP address or a name This direction should not be confused with the MAC address Port Corresponds to the communications port Advanced communication Permits the configuration of a series of additional parameters on the device See 2 2 1 3 Advanced configuration of devices device the program the programme will not attempt to detect or verify that the configuration Due to the large number of converters that can be found on the market On adding this N is correct The configuration and the proper functioning of communications between the converter and the program is the responsibility of user For more information on how to configure the converter consult the device manual 78 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 13 Generic TCP converter The generic TCP converter connects devices that work with serial communication RS 232 RS 485 to an Ethernet network using the IP protocol TCP for connection oriented communications Due to the large number of converters that can be found on the market On adding this device the program will not attempt to detect or verify that the configuration is correct The configuration and the proper functioning of communications between the converter and the program is the
160. an appear In addition this behaviour does not take into account whether the X axes are equal or not always forcing the enlargement regardless of this information thus allowing the expansion of two zones with different X axes something that would be impossible with the default behaviour 256 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada era Options Views General Qo Previous v g Devices Screens F Reports Events Properties B Print CVM144 Izquierda CVM K 2 CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L1 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L2 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L3 V 2 00 AM 3 00 AM 4 00 5 00 6 00 8 00 9 00 17 2008 K 2 Active energy T1 689 5 kWh CVM144 Izquierda V THD d L1 96 CVM1 44 Izquierda V THD d L2 96 12 00 2 00 4 00 6 00 8 00 10 00 12 00 2 00 4 00 6 00 8 00 10 00 Sep 17 2008 Date Next 72 Goto d Grouped by Period Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Graph with areas with different X axes the first zone has an X axis different from the other two The Shift key forces the enlargement to only affect the X axis even in the area where the expansion is taking place but keeps the enlargement of all the areas maintaining the X axis as in the default behaviour Note that if a graph consists of a single area this change in behav
161. an even see how many times an event was enabled how many times it was deactivated how many it was recognized and how long it was enabled 14 4 23 How can produce sounds in response to an event To produce a sound in response to an event we should add an action to run an external program and enter the corresponding WAV MP3 etc with its full path in the programme field For the action to take effect you will need to have a program installed that can play back this type of file for example Windows Media Player Sonique Winamp etc If what is needed is simply reproducing a bleep on the client application an action associated with this event can be added to carry it out Likewise this action can occur during activation recognition on deactivation or while active Help to create an action What action you want to add a Execute an external Show a device programme Show a scada screen Show report C B Audible alarm x Cancel Support for the audible alarm action on the client in response to an event 329 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 24 How do show documents in response to an event In a similar manner to the previous point adding an action to run an external program and entering the file to be shown PDF TXT DOC etc and its corresponding path For the action to take effect you will need to have a program installed that can read this type of file for example Microsoft Word Ad
162. any device all counters for the different maximum demand and energy variables Clicking once with the left mouse button on the coloured box B 1 the following dialogue appears where you can configure the colour for the type of day 170 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Custom colors m 117 EEEE EN EN EN 11 EN Hue 20 Red 255 Sat 240 Green 128 Define Custom Colors gt gt Coloris olid Lum 120 Blue jo Cancel Add to Custom Colors Clicking the Delete button will delete all the types of hours selected from the list After defining the types of hours these will then be distributed throughout each day defining for them the different types of days which will make up our discriminator 5 1 2 Types of day Day type management Winter day db Add P Madity a Delete wf Accept Cancel By means of this dialogue the different discriminator day type may be added deleted or modified On adding or modifying the following dialogue will appear Modify day type Mame Winter day Ld Calor Representation Jh Add P oy Delete ew Accept Cancel As you can see the definition of a type of day implies indicating the types of hour into which it is divided e g a Sunday could have all day defined as a type of reduced tariff time and a weekday may be divided into two sections i e daytime and night time 171 PowerStudio
163. any interference in the cable run from the converter to the PC Make sure your PC is correctly connected to the communications network and can communicate with other equipment connected to the network for example with another PC If you are using a router make sure the communication port is redirected in the router to the converter address 14 4 31 can not see the applet What is happening Check that the local computer has the Microsoft Internet Explorer Netscape Mozilla or Firefox browser installed Ensure that the Java Virtual Machine JRE 1 6 6 0 or later is installed If they are not installed the browser will provide information and guide us through the installation process If the applet appears but shows a message warning that it is unable to communicate with the server or unable to retrieve the required information make sure the program is in running mode and the Web server is enabled 14 4 4 The Applet does not display the texts properly What is happening It is possible that some fonts applied to the controls when designing a report or a SCADA screen do not exist on the machine on which the applet is downloaded and in consequence the font chosen may be markedly different to the original 14 4 5 The values display is not what expected What is happening It is possible that a conditional control or a formula refers to a variable of a device which does not communicate or that has not yet been interrogated for the first
164. are any problems with displaying variable colours and will change the variables that it deems appropriate 273 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph properties gm ix fone 1 QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Voltage L1 MAIN Voltage L1 MAIN Voltage L2 MAIN VY THD d L1 81 0 511 0 MAIN Current L1 MAIN Current L2 ef Ok x Cancel Intelligent automatic change of colours The resulting figure would be as follows b Graph QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER MAIN PowerStudio Scada n m RI Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens Reports Events 3 Properties gt Print QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER MAIN QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Voltage L1 V MAIN Voltage L1 V MAIN Voltage L2 V MAIN Voltage L3 V c NM MAIN V THD d L1 96 MAIN Current L1 A MAIN Current L2 A 6 0 1 8 17 18 sah 19 20 21 5 Sep 2008 Date O Back Next 12 Goto d Grouped by 4 Period Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 Graph with variables from multiple devices 274 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 8 7 Printing a graph The user can print the actual page of the graph at any time using print in the menu Options of the main menu or the Print button of the upper toolbar Note that this option unlike that in the
165. ariables from the table simply by selecting the variables that we want to remove and clicking on the Delete button As with the graphs the user can print the actual page of the graph at any time using the Print option in the Options menu of the main menu or the Print button of the upper toolbar Note that this option unlike that in the SCADA screens is enabled for tables It is also possible to export this table by clicking Export in the Options menu of the main menu It will be exported in text format where each line of text is a row of the table and where each column is separated by the symbol A common feature in all tables is that they can be sorted by columns by clicking on them By default tables usually appear sorted by date usually the first column but they can be ordered by other variables By clicking on the title of a column it will be ordered in ascending order if we click again on the same place it will be ordered in descending order and a third click will bring it back to its original format A column may also be ordered so that a second column can be ordered depending on the first For example if we have a column that represents a type of group to which each row belongs to and another which represents a numerical value associated with each row we can order first by the column group by clicking on the column title and then pressing the CTRL key clicking on the title of the column that represents the magni
166. arm value configured for the channel Instantaneous earth leakage current value of the channel When the Instantaneous earth leakage current value of the channel exceeds the limits of the value bar either in excess or default this will be indicated as shown in the figure arrow below the value Earth leakage current value detected when the channel trigger occurs 59 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 6 CDR 8 3 6 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CDR B Driver parameters Device parameters 3 6 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CDR B configuration Device Information Peripheral number 10 CDH 8 Identifier Version COR 8 1 60 Description Configure prealarm Defined values Device Enable reclosing of prealarm relay Current Normally open 09 Synchnorise clock 0 Synchronize clock Marmally closed M Prealarm threshold Delay time s Hysterisis for this channel in relay made pO Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel amp Channel 7 Channel 8 Description Trip threshold
167. arrying out this kind of change However these controls will continue to exist and if the change is carried out again they will become visible again 192 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 2 6 Editing tools These tools carry out the same operations as the options from the menus File and Edit see sections 2 1 File Menu and 2 3 Edit Menu Save This tool allows changes made in the report to be saved le Save as This tool allows a copy of the report to be saved with a different name Cut This tool will copy the controls selected to the clipboard and delete them from the report The same result will be obtained clicking the combination of Control X E Copy This tool will copy the selected controls to the clip board The same result will be obtained clicking the combination of Control C 14 Paste This tool will paste the clipboard controls in the report The same result will be obtained clicking the combination of Control X Undo This tool allows recent changes to be reversed to edit a previous state The same result will be obtained clicking the combination of Control 72 Delete This tool will delete the controls in the report amp Select everything This tool will select all the report controls The same result will be obtained clicking the combination of Control E 193 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 Scada The SCADA allows us to display one or more window
168. as been selected the corresponding window will appear for the configuration of these actions 218 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Because there are incompatibilities between actions for example it is not possible to show a device and a screen at once by adding more than one action the non compatible actions will not appear with those already added 10 3 2 1 Forcing a variable This action can only be done on the communications engine It allows the value of a variable such as a digital output or a counter to be changed Force variable new action Variable Empty cell Value Empty cell J Accept Cancel To configuration the action an expression must be entered which corresponds to the variable you want to force and another expression that corresponds to the value at which we wish to force the variable Both the variable expression and the value could be entered manually or using the corresponding wizard 10 3 2 2 Running an external program This action may take place in both the communications engine and on the client application This allows an external application that is present in the system such as listening to an audio file Executing external application new action Prograrn Parameters For correct operation it is advisable to indicate in the Program field the complete directory where the programme can be found in order to enable the engine and the client app
169. aste Ckr V enabling cutting copying or pasting variables both in the same report as well as enabling the copy of formulae to be copied between different reports or SCADA screens It may be possible that some of the options from the context menu do not appear cut and copy will only appear if there is a formula selected and the paste option only if the formulae have been copied or cut onto the clipboard If no formulae are selected and there are no formulae on the clipboard when the right button is clicked the context menu will not appear Clicking the Delete button the formula selected will be deleted Push Add or Modify to open the formula modification window Modify formula Mame F2 Formula FI Fumace VIz Evaluation Accept 3 Cancel Where we can give names to formula and itemize it see appendix 14 2 Expressions and conditions It should be noted that there are certain formula names not permitted therefore the name of the formula cannot contain certain types of special characters nor be one of the reserved words The reserved words are those that match the name of a function available see appendix 14 2 Expressions and conditions Horizontal Vertical Orientation This tool enables the orientation of the report sheet to be defined Controls do not reorganise on changing from horizontal to vertical or vice versa so it is possible that they may no longer be seen when c
170. atio f enabled this option will maintain the width and height proportions of the selected background image If disabled it will force the image to occupy the entire width and height of the SCADA screen expanding or shrinking its measures as appropriate Alignment E NI W It enables the image chosen to be situated as the background to any of the seven positions defined in the figure This button located on the upper toolbar will allow the characteristics of the grid to be configured as well as the SCADA screen size being described 196 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Modify screen Size Wide 8 High 1624 Background adapted arid size Horizontal 11 Vertical x Cancel The width and height of the screen is measured in pixels and the size of the grid will specify in pixels the distance between a point on the grid and another in horizontal or vertical If a background image has been selected the size of the SCADA screen can be adapted to the size of this background by checking box Background adapted In terms of tools there are several grouped together depending on their use e Action tools d i 45 V E 0 ApS RAN e Positioning tools HE 183 9 5 General tools He 5 8 8 2 1 Action tools The following action tools actions have already been explained in Chapter 7 Reports Select controls see section 7 2 1 1 Text control see section 7 2 1 2 Control i
171. be the minimum number of digits with which the value can be represented o m gt minutes The number of letters will be the minimum number of digits with which the value can be represented o S gt seconds The number of letters will be the minimum number of digits with which the value can be represented o Using speech marks a text can be added to any part of the model The apostrophe is only needed if some of the characters used in the model are required Date 08 10 2008 5115010 This option will only appear in the case of having selected any date Therefore a specific date can be chosen to show in the report _ This button will enable us to add as style the customised configuration that we have defined to control the active text and to use this style in other controls 185 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 2 1 5 4 Formula control This tool will permit a formula to be included in the report the final result will be seen in the report Once this tool has been selected it will be necessary to draw a rectangle on the report by keeping the left mouse button pressed The properties than can be configured from this control are Styles Personalized We can also select the style of text created previously or create a new one personalised for the formula Fant 9 This will correspond to the font type used for the text of the formula Bold ltt Depending on the font selected either bold and or cursive
172. before making the first enlargement therefore if we are viewing a week of data we cannot move to the previous or following week using the pan option or on top of the upper margin of the Y axis or below the lower of the axis itself When we have a graph with more than one display area the pan mode establishes by default behaviour through which all areas with the same X axis as the area where the anchor is established must move This behaviour can be changed by using the Control key if we keep the key held down while we move the window we indicate to the programme that only the window on which the anchor is established must move This will cause the X axes to be no longer matched Graph CVM144 izquierda 2 PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens E Reports PS Graph Table 2 Events Properties Print CVM144 Izquierda CVM 2 CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L1 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L2 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L3 V 2 00 AM 3 00 4 00 7 00 8 00 17 2008 K 2 Active energy T1 290 4 kWh 1 00 AM 2 00 AM 3 00 AM 4 00 AM 5 00 AM 6 00 AM 8 00 AM 9 00 AM 10 00 AM Sep 17 2008 CVM144 Izquierda V THD d L1 96 CVM1 44 Izquierda V THD d L2 12 00 AM 2 00 AM 4 00 AM 6 00 AM 8 00 AM 10 00 AM 12 00 PM 2 00 PM 4 00 PM 6 00 PM 8 00 PM 10 00 PM Sep 17 2008 Date Next 12 Go to f Grouped by 2 Period
173. ble Orientation degrees u Corresponds to the orientation of date text The orientation expressed in degrees could be between 0 and 350 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available Clicking on the button the date text colour can be selected 184 Alignment KE oe PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Basic colors ttt iol io Custom colors 8 B E HH HH rTTTTTTT a Sat 240 Green 126 20 ColorlSolid Lum 120 Blue n Cancel Add to Custom Colors This will allow us to decide on which part of the rectangle defined in the report sheet the date text will be placed Date format Ce 1 Here the date format will be established Several are pre defined and can be manually entered from the keyboard The different models defined are o y gt year If the number of letters is or more the full year is represented 2006 and if not the abbreviated value 06 o M Month If the number of letters is or more it will be interpreted as the name of the month if not the number of the month o d gt date The number of letters will be the minimum number of digits with which the value can be represented o gt Day of the week If the number of letters is 4 or more the full name of the day of the week is represented If the value is less the abbreviation of the name is represented o H Time of day from O to 23 The number of letters will
174. can be entered manually or using the wizard see appendix 14 2 Wizard for the creation of expressions and conditions o hw Once condition has been specified click the New button and condition will be added to the condition list To delete a condition from the list just select it or push the Delete button When there is more than one condition on the list the control will activate when one of more of them is complied with r Will allow the floodfill colour to be applied Simulate f this box is enabled in the edit mode a simulation of the final outcome of the floodfill control will be shown painting the area to be painted as it would be in the run mode if the selected condition is fulfilled Tolerance 0 E You can also select the tolerance this control will have with a maximum of 1000 200 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 2 1 10 IP camera control The IP camera control will allow us to add the image of one of the cameras added to the system in any area of any SCADA screen This is an image that is refreshed in real time The properties of this control are as follows IF Chamera Pedraforca Maintain real size Maintain aspect ratio Alignment BM 2 Refresh image IP camera control property area Offers the possibility of indicating from which camera we want to obtain the sequence of images as well as the properties which will be applied to those
175. can choose the most suitable as can be seen later Similarly there are types of graph where this axis does not represent time in this case the units represented and the range of values contained will be indicated o Drawing area Contains the actual figure representing the variables of the area in question There is a drawing area for each area of representation 252 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Toolbar Contains a series of actions that can be performed on the graph Depending on the type of graph it will contain more or fewer options The typical actions are going to the previous interval going to the next going to a user defined interval grouping according to a predefined interval or changing the grouping period Any graph can always be found in the so called operating mode which determines the behaviour of the drawing area and the use of the mouse on it There are four possible modes of operation Zoom mode Lets enlargements be made on one portion of the graph This mode is accessed through F1 key or the corresponding option of the context menu of the graph Pan Mode Lets the present window be moved using the mouse dragging and dropping This mode is only available if a Zoom has been carried out before and it is accessed by the F1 key or the corresponding option of the graph context menu Tooltip Mode Lets us see the values of the variables in the position of the mouse cursor This mode is accessed through the F3 key
176. communication alarm 5 Referenced voltage error alarm 6 Alarm digital output Notenabled o 0 Not enabled Enabled 14 1 11 2 CBS 4 Earth leakage current Detected of the channel Of the protection Alarm relay Channel x x 1 4 AELIx AELDx STx OC X X Channel status Not Triggered 0 Earth leakage current exceeded Protection status Not enabled Enabled Pre alarm relay status NIS Not enabled Enabled On CBS 4 devices we can reset the x channel forcing the status variable of the RSTx to value 0 or remotely trigger the channel forcing the variable to 1 303 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 11 3 CBS 8 CDR 8 Earth leakage current Detected Of the output Pre alarm relay pealael Channel x x 1 8 AELIx AELDx Six DOO CBS 8 CDR 8 X X Status of the channel output Not Triggered NotTriggered 1 1 O0 Earth leakage current exceeded Output triggered Output latched Pre alarm relay status Notenabled o O0 Not enabled Enabled On CBS 8 and CDR 8 devices we can reset the x channel forcing the status variable of the STx to value 16 We can also remotely trigger the x channel forcing the RFCx variable to 1 to activate remote triggering or O to deactivate it 14 1 11 4 CIRWATT The following shows the specific variables of the CIRWATT devices the shared
177. condition from the list just select it or push the Delete button When there is more than one condition on the list the control will activate when one of more of them is complied with Clicking the right hand button of the mouse on the report sheet will enable us to cut copy paste delete select all the controls or show or hide the toolbar uk Copy Undo Delete Select all yw Actions w Position w Pages w 200m w Various w Editing wv Properties 187 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 2 1 7 Embedded Graphic Control This tool allows us to include a graph embedded in a report This control like others can be placed anywhere in the report and enables a large amount of variables to be viewed This control allows the style of the same to be configured the style of the texts of the axes and keys namely the font size colour etc If you want to see or hide the variable keys the colour of the axes the background colour it can also be transparent and the variables to be represented Styles Estilo 1 24 hours View legends H Foreground color Transparent E Background color D M 35 Vp Add mm Delete E Calor Control properties of the graph embedded in reports and the control representation For each variable it is possible to choose the colour and type of representation we want The types possible are bar graph li
178. connected to the channel There are three possible selection options e Channel disabled Fullscale channel of 6A 30mA 6A Fullscale channel of 60A 300mA 60A Operating mode Earth leakage mode Relay mode Channel operating mode Depending on the selected mode some of the configuration options of the channel may be disabled Type of relay output Normally open closed Channel output relay operating mode Trip threshold 5 0 4 Channel triggering threshold depending type of toroid connected the available values will be Toroid 30 mA 6A Toroid 300 mA 60A 1A Customised Customised Only if the value of the customised trigger threshold does not exceed 6A Delay time s Instantaneous Channel delay time depending on the selected operating mode the possible values are Only if the channel works on the relay mode Delay time OFF s i 1 Delay time in the channel reset when working on the relay mode the possible values are 0 1s 0 4s 0 85 62 working latched PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Latch selection f with latch option Without latch eptien Channel latch selection when working on the relay mode Detection mode f HIGH Triggering selection low current LOW or overcurrent HIGH of the channel when in relay mode Number of reclogures Number of attempts at reclosure After this number relay wil
179. cords dateTime Date and time of the sample field Standard value register fieldComplex Complex value register fieldARM Harmonic value register fieldFO Waveform value register fieldEVQ EVQ event register Here are the different types of values that can be returned by this request e Standard value registers voltages currents power energy etc lt field gt lt id gt Lr lt id gt value value Field Variable identifier device variable value Value e Complex value register PLT etc lt fieldComplex gt lt id gt lt id gt lt value gt value lt flags gt lt flags gt lt fieldComplex gt Variable identifier device variable Value Value Flags Additional information from the variable formed by the union of one or more of the following values 0 0000 gt The PLT is correct 0x0001 gt The PLT calculation has been done with fewer samples than expected 0 0002 gt The PLT calculation has been done with more samples than expected 0 0004 gt The samples used in the PLT calculation do not have equidistant separation in the sampling window 0x0008 Some PST used the calculation of the PLT contain events in phase 1 0x0010 gt Some PST used in the calculation of the PLT contain events in phase 2 0x0020 gt Some PST used in the calculation of the PLT contain events in phase 3 0x0040 gt Some PST used in the calculatio
180. corresponding value when the event is enabled hence for two different activations of a single event two different annotations may also correspond As previously discussed one of the uses of the annotations is being able to register the value of a specific variable at the time the event is enabled so we can display extra information in the event viewer Below are the different parameters that may be used in the annotation Description Name of event Condition of the event Condition for the deactivation of the event Delay in enabling Delay in disabling Name of disable timetable Text associated with the event Group Name x where x is the order of the group within the list of groups The order will be displayed with a number to the left of the name of the group Argument where will be the order of the argument within the list of arguments The order will be displayed with a number on the left side of the argument The arguments are explained in more detail in section 10 3 1 1 Arguments Character Each of these parameters will be replaced correspondingly when the event is enabled for example if the annotation is Event name n was enabled when the voltage marked a1 V When the event is enabled the annotation created specifically for this activation will be Event name Main voltage was enabled when the voltage marked 256 V To facilitate the creation of the annotation clicking on the button wizard
181. d Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Digital outputs Flow Description Using the Satter Entradas digitales Salidas dsitales Caudales the display configuration of the different types of variables can be configured The previous image shows the configuration of the counters where e Description Alphanumeric type which permits a brief description of the counter so it can be identified better e Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units where the counter is displayed to be entered e Factor Multiplicative value of each input pulse 138 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada For digital inputs Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Digital outputs Flow Description e Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the digital input to be entered for better identification For digital outputs Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Digital outputs Flows Description e Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the digital output to be entered for better identification Finally for the flow configuration Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Digital outputs Flow Description Unit Factor Time min Calculation window s Ww w B E 30 Accept Cancel Checking the selector will activate the flow variable Remember if this
182. d Units Text of the units in which the calculated variable value is expressed Forcible vaieble Allows the possibility of changing the value of the variable from the SCADA screen or an event to be enabled M or disabled Only variables that do not contain references to other variables devices or calculations in the formula may be forced Agrupation criteria t Masimum value f Minimum value Average value f Last value Malues summation Enables the grouping criteria for the virtual values in graphs tables and reports to be selected For example if we have a value each 5 minutes e g 10 12 and 7 and we group together the values every 15 minutes this is group together the 3 values in 1 the value obtained will be e Maximum value The maximum value of the 3 12 will be shown Minimum value The minimum value of the 3 7 will be shown Average value The average value of the 3 10 12 7 3 9 66 will be shown Last value The last value 7 will be changed Sum of the values The sum of the values will be shown 10 12 7 29 177 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Accuracy f Without decimals t 1 decimal t 2 decimal f 3 decimal This enables the number of decimal places for the calculated variable to be selected Formula E NN Discriminator Screen Graph Events Reports Table Here the formula which will give the result of the virtual variable is shown It can be entered manually or
183. d of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes Type of window Type of window used to save the maximeter value it can be fixed or sliding Maximeter reset When the button is enabled the device maximeter goes to zero frequency f 50Hz BO Hz Configuration of the nominal working frequency of the device Distortion calculation AMS Fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion the device will calculate can be configured Temperature 9 C Configuration of the units of the temperature value measured by the device Tariffs Synchronism type Number af tariffs f clack 1 Digital inputs Alarm date form change tariff 11 07 2008 120527 z First synchronism input Expansion card 1 Digital input 1 7 Calendar Tariff configuration of the device o Type of synchronism Indicates to the device if the synchronism of tariffs is made by the device itself internal clock by the configured calendar or the synchronism is given by an external signal Digital Input The digital input type will only be allowed when the device has digital input expansion cards o First synchronism input Only if the kind of synchronism is by means of digital inputs The digital inputs corresponding to tariff 1 must be chosen o Number of tariffs The number of tariffs to be used in the device must be chosen 101 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Tariff change ala
184. dates begin and end Each of the variables for which information is to be obtained must be included in the request as var device variable The format of begin and end will be DDMMAAAA when you wish only to indicate the date in this case the hour will 00 00 00 or DDMMAAAAHHMMSS when both the date and the hour are specified Both begin as end must be expressed in UTC Universal Coordinated Time Finally we may specify the period of data grouping using the period parameter This value may be FILE data not grouped returning the register as they have saved in the log AUTO Grouping will take place automatically depending on the specified dates begin and end ALL Data is grouped into a single value gt 0 Value in seconds in which the data is grouped If the period parameter does not appear on the petition it shall be considered as value 0 and the data will not be grouped recordGroup period period record dateTimes datetimes rield 2 field gt fieldComplex fieldComplex fieldARM fieldARM fieldFO fieldFO lt fieldEVQ gt lt fieldEVQs lt record gt lt recordGroup gt 318 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Where recordGroup Main field which will identify the XML as a response to the variable register request e period Register period Will report on time elapsed between records record Will Identify each of the re
185. day Returns the day of the current date month Returns the month of the current date Year Return the year of the current date 310 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada These functions return values on the date in the local time of the engine and server editor As they do not contain parameters they can be used with or without brackets The second returns a value between 0 and 59 like the minute function The hour function returns a value between 0 and 23 The day functions returns a value between 1 and 31 The month function returns a value between 1 and 12 The following time functions are available only in reports secondsinperiod Returns the number of seconds in the current period of the report minutesinperiod Returns the number of minutes in the current period of the report hoursinperiod Returns the number of hours in the current period of the report daysinperiod Returns the number of days in the current period of the report beginsecond Returns the initial second in the actual period of the current report beginminute Returns the initial minute in the current period of the report beginhour Returns the initial hour in the current period of the report beginday Returns the initial day in the actual period of the report beginmonth Returns the initial month in the current period of the report beginyear Returns the initial year in the current period of the report endsecond Return
186. distribution of the areas axes and variables As can be seen in the previous window a schematic representation of the variables and their organization in areas and axes is shown When the mouse is moved over this representation those elements that we can modify i e variables axes and areas will be highlighted 264 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph properties V MAIN 88 0 234 0 Voltage L1 Voltage 2 Voltage L3 96 MAIN 1 0 2 5 V THD d L1 MAIN 78 7 521 8 Current 11 Current L2 Select a variable and click to change the properties of the same If we want change for example the representation properties of the phase 1 voltage distortion variable place the cursor here and click with the left mouse button Representation type Line style oint style Ps Ge Line width u O Screen configuration of the representation of a variable This screen will allow us to configure the type of representation Lines bars or points colour line style only if you select the type of representation in the form of lines the dot style only if you select the type of representation in the form of dots and the thickness of the line only if you select the type of representation in the form of lines In the event that we have selected the type of representation in lines we can choose the style from five different possibilities solid dashed dotted dash dot and dash dot dot
187. ditor has been enabled for the authentication of users it is possible that the client asks us to enter the user name and password to access the various resources available This will be done through a screen like this User Password PO _ Connect like anonymous user User authentication window The user must correctly identify themselves to access the resource If the user and password are unknown we can try a connection as an anonymous user which provides access to certain resources provided it has been properly configured on the engine editor If the user is not identified correctly you will have three attempts the customer will not be allowed access to the resource RGU10 PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous Next v g Devices Screens Reports 2 Graph Table Events x Unauthorized access to this resource Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Access denied to the resource It is possible that once authenticated the client will require new identification when trying to enter an area where they do not have viewing privileges In any case you can always close the current session to force the customer to require user identification again This can be done the option Logout from the General menu in the main menu 289 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Toolbar Statusbar Allarm if it doesn t communicate Events actions KA Connect xS Logout 2 Look and feel 2 Abou
188. dress to be assigned to the device 72 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device configuration 265 Physical address MAC IP address 152 168 111 120 Physical address MAC Ethernet address written an the device label unique and different Far every system device tis a number like 00 20 44 61 05 19 Accept Cancel Where e Physical address MAC Ethernet address that each device has which is unique and distinct on all network devices The hardware addresses which each network interfaces possess will be type 00 20 4 61 05 19 IP address IP Address to be allocated to the device that has the physical address entered in the previous field If it is possible to assign an IP address to the converter the following dialogue box will appear Device configuration TCP2RS IF address 132 168 111 Netmask 255 255 Gateway 80 8 Automatically obtain IP address DHCP Part 1 0001 Zx Cancel To finish setting up the rest of the parameters for communication with the device 73 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 10 Converter TCP2RS ModbusTCP The TCP2RS converter connects equipment which works with serial communication RS 232 RS 485 to an Ethernet network using the IP protocol ModbusTCP for connection oriented communications On adding or modifying this device see 2 2 1 1 Adding a first level device the following dialogue will appear N
189. ds xml begin fo bi Pagina iQ Herramientas lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt recordGroup gt lt period gt 900 lt period gt lt record gt lt dateTime gt 10062008220000 dateTime lt field gt lt id gt CVM K 2 VI1 lt id gt lt value gt 40 518478 lt value gt lt field gt lt record gt lt recordGroup gt internet amp 100 325 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Result of the request from the Internet Explorer browser Where in the value field we have the desired value This request can be done directly from say the Excel spreadsheet by simply writing this request in the dialogue Open instead of the name of a file Excel will interpret the previous XML and generate a table with data E3 Microsoft Excel t Archivo Edici n Insertar Formato Herramientas Datos Ventana 1 22 id 3 3 608 13 3 1 4 5a 310 0 x 21 93 3223 12 24 iu iil Y Responder con cambios Terminar revisi n C CVM K 2 40 518478 1 2 Hoja3 Open petition with Excel 2003 D1 we have the data 14 4 15 tried to make a table with the client application and get the Message Table too Big What can do to see it The client is a Java application As a Java application it runs on a virtual machine with a limited memory for it to run assigned by default Norm
190. e the mouse will have the following aspect LI AL Mouse cursor indicating that we are in the Magnifying mode in the area enabled for this 260 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada This will tell us that we are in magnifying glass area and that we can enable the enlargement area when we so desire clicking the left mouse button Logically the extension window can be re sized and positioned as we wish like any other window Another possibility is to vary the size of the square area around the mouse cursor we want to expand This can be done through the mouse wheel or if the mouse does not have this feature through the keys greater square area and smaller square area 12 2 8 5 Toolbar The graphs always have a toolbar at the bottom that allows a series of actions related to the data to be shown G Back Next k Goto f Grouped by Period Toolbar of a typical graph The typical options available in the toolbar are e Previous Allows access to the previous interval of data Typically the range of previous data is the function of the grouping of data and if we group data by days on going to the previous interval we will see the data of the previous day being displayed There are types of graph where grouping does not make sense since they are viewing values of a specific date for example in QNA harmonics graphs in this case by clicking on this option we will see the data corresponding to the date immediately afte
191. e available space and contains the current active view PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada N b While this is the general view of the software once it has been configured and the installation is running it can and should be minimised using the button to the left of the four buttons on the top right hand corner of the window The programme will then only be shown as an icon in the shape of a small orange arrow on the right hand side of the toolbar where the time and other programmes such as the anti virus etc can normally be found which run in the background on the machine Restore Exit Thus avoiding the bother of having it permanently visible on screen while at the same time avoiding that it is accidently closed or that other machine users are tempted to use it To return to Power Studio again normally it is enough just to double click on the icon and select Restore from the contextual menu which appears when clicking on the right hand mouse button As you can see when the right hand mouse button is clicked as well as the Hestore option the Exi option is also available Use this option to leave the programme outright PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 Menu Bar 2 1 File Menu Save Save as Exit Save This option can only be used when editing a SCADA screen or a report otherwise it remains disabled It enables changes to be made to the SCADA screen or a report while it is being edited Save O
192. e background configuration properties of the report in the information panel will automatically appear These properties are the same as those which appear if at any time there is no control selected Show grid Background image Maintain aspect ratio Alignment 180 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Show sid The Show grid option enables the grid which indicates the position of objects the screen to be shown or hidden If the grid is shown the object will be automatically aligned to the points of the grid selecting this option one of the images added to the image manager can be selected see section 2 2 6 Image manager so that it can appear in the report background Image selection Select the image to be used 21 1 Energy 4 1 General Screen 1 Switches UMIFIL2 UNIFILS Accept Zx Cancel Deebiawnins Click on this button to delete the present background image Maintain aspect ratio When enabled this option will maintain the width and height proportions of the selected background image If disabled it will force the image to occupy the entire length and width of the report sheet expanding or contracting it as required Alignment It enables the image chosen to situated as background in any of the seven positions defined in the figure oons This button situated in the upper toolbar allows the characteristics of the grid to be configu
193. e incident is enabled Only if the event is saved on file Only if the incident is reported 309 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 2Expressions and conditions Many parts of the program allow the inclusion of terms or conditions To enter these there is a standard text control available accompanied by a help button that will guide you through editing them Thus some valid examples would be 2 D Zod 2A 972 The following mathematical functions can also be used sqrt exp Square root of the expression exp log exp Neperian logarithm of the expression exp Exp exp Number elevated to the expression exp sin exp Sine of the expression exp in radiants Cos exp Cosine of the expression exp in radiants tan exp Tangent of the expression exp in radiants asin exp Arcsine of the expression exp in radiants Acos exp Arccosine of the expression exp in radiants atan exp Arctangent of the term exp atan2 expl exp2 Extended arctangent of the expression 2 10g10 exp Base 10 logarithm of the expression exp round exp Rounding off to whole number nearest to the expression exp trunc exp Truncation to the whole number of the expression exp pi Returns the number IP 3 1415927 Returns the number E 2 7182818 mod expl exp2 Return the module exp2 of the expression exp1 max expl exp2 Returns the maximum of the two
194. e minimum and maximum value of the events that have this duration in this phase are indicated k Table Duration QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events Duration 1 1 QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events Duration L2 QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Ev Options Views General Previous Next v Duration QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events Duration L1 1 7 47 Vn 1 123 1296 Vn 1 89 0796 Vn 2 15 18 21 6496 Vn 1 86 4496 Vn 1 85 6496 Vn 1 87 0496 Vn 1 65 70 Vn 2 10 35 11 26 Vn 2 89 64 89 75 Vn 1 69 8996 Vn 2 69 96 70 3296 Vn 2 84 52 84 6696 Vn 3 69 97 79 3096 Vn 6 69 38 85 6496 Vn 3 70 36 71 01 Vn 2 84 94 85 4696 Vn 2 69 84 69 8596 Vn 2 78 69 79 64 Vn 2 79 71 79 97 Vn 1 79 1996 Vn 1 79 0796 Vn o Back o Next Goto f Grouped by Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 Event duration event 283 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Harmonic tables and waveforms show the same information as the equivalent graph but as a list however the efficient semi circle voltage table shows more information Table Date time QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events Semicycle effective voltage L1 V QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events Semicycle effective voltage L i Options Views General Qo Previous Next v g Devices Screens Reports 2e Graph
195. e situated in the installation of the JRE virtual machine ermission java io FilePermission ALL FILES gt gt execute J must be noted however that the Applet can not directly display files directly from the run control in the way SCADA can So if we wanted to show an image in applet it is not enough to enter the name of the image in the run control but rather we should enter the application we want to use to show the image and as a parameter the image to show Note The option to launch external applications very much depends on the system in which applet is running and it is highly probable that it will only work in the system for which the application has been developed 14 4 10 How can see the applet from a machine which is not running Windows The applet can be viewed without carrying out any other special action from all operating systems that have Java Virtual Machine 1 5 5 0 or later and an HTML browser Among others the following operating systems would satisfy these requirements Windows Linux Solaris SPARC Solaris x86 Solaris AMD64 Linux AMD64 and so on 14 4 11 How can draw a line in a report or a SCADA screen Although there is a specific tool to draw lines it is possible to carry out this function in two different ways 1 Draw lines you want in the background image beforehand 2 If you want to draw vertical and or horizontal lines and it is not practical to use method above
196. eclosure Fixed The channel is locked Additional information on the interlocking status Table with the partial and total counter values Cut off Element configured Information about the configured trigger current threshold Information about the configured trigger time Adjustment button Displays channel information and allows some parameters to be modified Reset button If the channel is triggered the button will remain disabled Push the button to restart the channel Off button Enables remote triggering of the channel to be made If the channel is tripped the button will remain disabled Value of instant leakage current If the value exceeds the limits of the values bar both over or under an arrow below the value will indicate this Trigger threshold value configured for the channel 161 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 36 RRM C This device does not keep a log so it will not be possible to make graphs or tables of any parameter shown by the device 3 36 1 Driver options Click on the Options buttons and information such as the model and the version of the device will be shown RRM C configuration Device Information Peripheral number FARM C Identifier Version 1 Description Z2 Cancel 3 36 2 Displaying values The RRM C device will show the following value screen 5 momo 6 7 Where Displays the status of the d
197. ed On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC 3 35 1 1 1 RGU 10 RGU 10 configuration Device Information Peripheral number 33 AGU 10 Identifier Version RGUIO 1 5 Description Operating system frequency Trigger coil output polarity Standard Positive Trigger current 4 Trigger delay s 0 1 20 ms Configure prealarm Prealarm threshold Activation delay s Disabled 0 75 Prealarm relay output polarity Operating mode f Standard f f Positive f Recoverable Accept Cancel 156 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number Model 33 AGU 10 Identifier Version AGUIO 14 Description Shows general information Operating system frequency peeeeeeneonecery Per TE Configuration of the frequency of the operating system Trigger coil output polarity f Standard Positive Configuration of the polarity of the trigger coil relay output allowing one of the two possible options to be selected standard or positive Trigger current 4 0 1 Configuration of the channel trigger threshold It will be possible to select of the following 0 03 A values Trigger delay s 20 ms gt Enables the trigger dela
198. ed how long has it been active if it active at the moment and how long has elapsed since it was last enabled The number of times something has occurred during the hour in course the day in course and so on can also be counted To do so create a calculable forcible variable initialized to 0 and event that when a condition is complied will undertake the action of forcing this variable to the same value plus a unit RSCAL_FORCED COUNTER1 RSCAL_FORCED COUNTER1 1 We then just need to add an event that would reset this counter to 0 when the date was outside XX XX XX 00 00 00 00 00 00 hours each day with which the counter would have the number activations of the day in course The counter reset could be carried out with a variable forced control on the SCADA screen in this case manual instead of automatic 14 4 14 would like to export the report data in order to process it later How do it The data displayed in a report is log data grouped together for the period of the report therefore we have a value per period if it is an expression where several variables are involved the value of each variable is recovered for the period of the report and the expression assessed For practical purposes the values of the variables that are used in the reports can be consulted by petitioning services user records xml which is documented in the XML user requests section Imagine then we have a report with the following as
199. ed into a SCADA screen present the following aspect in normal mode 202 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 2 2 Positioning tools The working of the positioning tools is the same as that which has been explained in Chapter 7 2 2 but applied to SCADA screen controls 8 2 3 Editing Tools The working of the general tools is the same as that which has been explained in Chapter 7 2 6 but applied to SCADA screen controls 203 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 9 Errors detection On passing to the run mode PowerStudio will check whether the configuration is correct checking possible mistakes on SCADA screens reports etc Once the entire checking has been carried out if there are any mistakes PowerStudio will give the opportunity of viewing these mistakes and correcting them PowerStudio Scada There are errors in the configuration Do you want bo see them If the answer is No and that we do not want to see the errors we move onto the run mode but it is possible that the behaviour is not as desired on those controls that contain errors That is why the configuration should not contain any errors An example of a screen with errors would be WE D DS PSR S SD mm LETTERE E 2L es k 3 VH CVM K 3 V1 Styl 2 yles Personalized T an Fant Arial Eod Size Faut E Color 4 Orientation degrees w
200. ed timing in the process of reclosure e Remote Channel disconnected by external triggering cannot be automatically reconnected Additional channel information enabled Informs that the reclosures for the channel have been enabled Only if the channel operates in earth leakage mode e Channel can be latched Reports that the channel will remain latched when triggering is produced with manual or remote reset of said channel being necessary Only if the channel works in the relay mode Reset button If the channel is not triggered the button will remain disabled Push the button to restart the channel Off button External disconnection of the channel The button will remain disabled if the channel has not been triggered Adjustment button Enables the sensitivity programming and channel delay Also shows channel information Instantaneous earth leakage current value of the channel When the instantaneous earth leakage current value exceeds the limits of the value bar both above and below this will be indicated as shown in the figure arrow below the value Trigger threshold value configured for the channel Pre alarm value configured for the channel Earth leakage current value detected when the channel is triggered 65 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 7 CIRWATT 1 Download with protocol IEC 870 5 102 The CIRWATT device allows load curve and bill closures files to be downloaded through the
201. ees bua Ve ev ate tease tas 66 uz PDI OP ON S a NT noto uro eed ofi 66 Sql DL LFU eds S 67 67 EZ Contracted POWE 68 duco E Ee Mea e 69 38 CONVERTER eate belli a a 70 Oo CONVERTER MEO ZI P Tm 71 CONVERTER MODBUSTO Diete 74 S l CONVERTER ICP2RS ONA RIISI 77 3427 GENERAL IDE CONVERTER 78 349 CONVER DI bh DU bo binc T A 79 214 JMODBUSTICP GENERIC CONVERTER 3 rd Rp E rta eee aor Enea eene Eo DEN e 80 MON IVs TAA 81 SEAT MED ew S 61 3 15 1 1 Lam Pc beste 81 SEN FOE GR MICI TIPP 85 SAO JDEVEFDDIONS Getitistasesrutit ittis ee t Med de 85 3 16 1 1 Device parame leS E T 85 850515715 err E E RM S 88 SADA Comechon wIIYMOUDUS TCP a E A OEE E A 88 Jd aes tx DORT m ene ORE 8
202. elay disconnected Relay connected Relay disabled The relay is not used by the device 46 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 3 IP Camera The IP Camera device only allows a captured image to be displayed either by connecting directly with a camera with an Ethernet connection a video recorder to which petitions can made or webcams It will not be possible to record display recordings or carry out any other action on the image displayed such as motion detection from the sources described beforehand The IP Camera device can display images generated from different sources IP cameras videos webcams etc provided web requests can be made to these sources and the response is a still image in JPEG format or video streaming format MJPEG 3 3 1 Adding an IP Camera For more information on how to add a device see section 2 2 1 Devices The following parameters are used to configure communication with an IP camera Hew Camera IP Mame Camera 1 Description IF address n 158 1 225 Part a Video MJPEG Fixed image Refresh Scada image 60 Seconds Route fuser image_up cgi camera 3 Accept Cancel e Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the same name Search e Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device IP Addres
203. en contracts will not appear For example if you only want to view contracts 1 and 3 the tabs will be as follows LJ contracti Jf contract 69 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 8 Converter RS232 485 The converter RS232 485 connects equipment which works with an RS 485 serial connection to the port of the PC with an RS 232 By adding or modifying this device see 2 2 1 1 Adding a first level device the following dialogue will appear Mew 5232 485 Mame Description Part Advanced setup Accept 3 Cancel Where e Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the same name e Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device e Number of the serial port that the program uses for communication with the device e Advanced setup Permits the configuration of a series of additional parameters of the device See section 2 2 1 3 Advanced configuration of devices 70 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 9 Converter TCP2RS The TCP2RS connects equipments which works with serial communication RS 232 RS 485 to an Ethernet network using the IP protocol On adding or modifying this device see 2 2 1 1 Adding a first level device the following dialogue will appear Modify TCP 2RS Mame Description Converter address Port Configuration port 10001 30718
204. en making such calls especially in cases where the name of any device contains non ASCII characters 14 3 1 services user devices xml Returns the list of configured devices lt devices gt lt id gt an lt id gt lt devices gt Where devices Main field which will identify the main XML as a response to the device list request Name of each one of the devices 14 3 2 services user devicelnfo xml idzdevice Returns information on devices Each of the devices on which information is required must be included in the petition as device2 id device2 devices device lt id gt lt id gt lt description gt lt description gt lt type gt type typeDescription typeDescription gt lt gt lt var gt lt device gt lt devices gt Where e devices Main Field which identified the XML a response to the information request from the devices e device Information from each of the devices requested of the device description Description of device type Type of device for example CVM144 typeDescription A description of the type of device for example CVM 144 var Name of each of the variables of the device The name is expressed as device variable see 14 1 Variables 315 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 3 3 services user varlnfo xml var device variable id device Returns variable
205. entification Ls Profiles 5 Users Anonymous user Users User brook profiles User name Full name Description Mame John Brook Administrator Administrator a tsimpson Tom Simpson Add user Sy Modify user Add profile jg Remove user Accept 3 Cancel Using this dialogue box the users who have access to the application resources are defined The list situated to the left of the dialogue contains the configured users while the right hand list shows the profiles associated to the users selected from the user list Clicking the right button on the mouse over the list of users the following contextual message will appear Copy Paste Ckrl v allowing users to be copied or pasted It may be possible that some of the options from the context menu do not appear copy will only appear if there is a user selected and the paste option only if the users have been previously copied onto the clipboard If no user is selected and there are no users on the clipboard when the right mouse button is clicked the context menu will not appear To add or modify a user click on the button corresponding to Add user or Modify user 32 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Modify user User name jibrook Full name ohn Brook Description Administrator Password Accept Cancel Where User name Will be an alphanumeric field which uniquely identifi
206. ep it pushed while moving it in the desired direction To move a control the left mouse button must be clicked on it 189 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada and must remain pressed while moving the mouse in the desired direction It will also be possible to move more than one control while grouping them inside a rectangle The left hand mouse button should also remained pressed at the same time to group two or more controls drawing a rectangle including the controls we wish to move inside it 7 2 2 Position tools Horizontally centre At least one control should be selected for use With this control one more controls situated on the report sheet can be aligned horizontally The control or controls will move to the left or the right to end up completely aligned on the page If this option is used with the Contro button pressed each of the controls selected will be aligned independently Vertically centre At least one control should be selected for use With this control one or more controls situated on the report sheet can be aligned vertically The control or controls will move or down to end up completely aligned on the page If this option is used with the Control button pressed each of the controls selected will be aligned independently Horizontally re size At least two controls should be selected so this tool can be used The horizontal size of a control can be aligned to another existing one using this tool
207. er factor minimum value last Last value earth leakage Earth leakage value between the current value and the previous one samples samples The value can not be grouped discrete Discreet values The value can not be grouped measureUnits Variable units NONE gt without units gt Voltage A gt Current gt Apparent power W gt Active power VARL gt Inductive power VARC gt Capacitive power PF gt Power factor 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 316 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada HZ gt Frequency PERCENT gt Percentage WH gt Active energy VARLH gt Inductive energy VARCH gt Capacitive energy DATETIME Date and time f not preceded by an this is a unit defined by the user UunitsFactor Power of 10 that indicates the value the variable is multiplied by in the log file decimals Decimals with this variable 14 3 4 services user values xml var z device variable id z device 9 9 9 9 Returns the instantaneous value of the variable when the XML request is carried out Each of the variables that the value is required from should be included in the petition as var device variable If you want to ascertain the value of all the variables of a device it should be indicated as id device With it being possible in a single request to request the value of one or more variables and values of one or more devices lt values gt lt variable gt
208. ergy Analog input 3 Active KWh Digital outputs Capacitive kvarCh Digital output 1 Closed Inductive kvarLh Digital output 2 Opened Maximum minimum reset Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Display screen of the equipment with maximum minimum reset button 247 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Clicking on this button a window will appear where we can select exactly which values we want to restart Each device provides a window for selecting different variables depending on the type the same type of device may even offer a separate window depending on how it is configured Phase neutral voltage Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Current E JE IP IP Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Inductive power Apparent power Power factor E JE Ee TES HEHEHEHE Cosine Phi Maximum demand Analog input 1 Analog input 2 t E E E E E E OOo Analog input 3 Maximum minimum reset window Another typical interaction is by clicking on a button This can include many different kinds from acting on any digital output of the equipment or on any aspect of the configuration to launching a special graph or viewing the table of historical events Graph Buttons to launch special graphs on the QNA screen There are devices that provide m
209. es the user This field will be used to identify the user when necessary e Full name Corresponds to the user s Full name e Description Field which permits a brief description of the user to be entered Password Password which serves to avoid unauthorised users accessing the application resources e Confirm password Field which serves to validate the password entered in the previous field The values entered in the Password and Confirm Password must be the same in order to consider the password valid If we want to delete one or more users select those users we wish to delete from the user list and click Delete User button Click on the Aad Profiles button and new profiles can be assigned to the user selected from the user list Add profile user jbrook E Profiles Accept 3 Cancel The dialogue will only show those profiles which have not been previously assigned to the user In this case for the user brook only the User profile will be shown as it is the only one which has not been assigned to the user On choosing Accept the profiles selected from the list will be assigned to the user 33 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada we want to delete a user profile select those profiles we wish to delete from the user and click Delete profiles button Bear in mind that these profiles are only deleted from the user profile list and in no case are they deleted from the application 2 2 12
210. est of the users allowing access to the different resources of the application 2 2 12 2 1 Profiles Setup authentification a Protiles Users Anonymous user Profiles Resources at profile Administrator Resource ES Administrator Display 144 Display DM 96 Display C Add profile we Madity profile we Remove profile Accept 3 Cancel Using this dialogue box the different profiles used for remote access to the application resources are defined The list situated to the left of the dialogue contains the profiles while the right hand list shows the resources associated to the selected profile Click on the right button on the mouse on the list of profiles to show the contextual menu Copy Ctrl C Paste Ckrl v enabling styles to be pasted and copied Some of the options from the contextual menu may not appear copy will only appear if there is a profile selected on the list and the paste option only if the styles have been previously copied onto the clipboard If no profile is selected and there are no styles on the clipboard when the right button is pushed the contextual menu will not appear 30 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Clicking on Add profile or Modify profile will bring up the following dialogue box New profile Mame D 1 g Device m Screen E Report B Events amp Calculated variables 3 Other Display Force variables Conf
211. eter Feriod Window type Primary Secundary n Voltage Unit Active power Current reset Distortion calculation Energy counters THD Effective value A Reset fundamental Variable Miniman Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 vj 2 0 0 Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 2 Current L2 A 0 0 0 Accept Cancel Alarms 92 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Informatian Peripheral number Model 4 C M BC Identifier Version C M BC 4 03 Description Shows general information Password Enable password Password Repeat password Enables the password to be enabled or deactivated to block the configuration of the device by means of the keyboard Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage i Current 9000 Depending on the version connected programming of the voltage transformation ratio can be disabled e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The product value between primary value and primary current has to be equal or less than 20 000 000 The primary value depending on fullscale must be between 1 and the value of the following table Maximum value e Current transformation ratio This is the primary current value device possesses The value can be between 1 and 10 000 A The secondary current is 5A in the CVM BC
212. etween saving information we have 3 values 10 12 and 7 these will be saved in the log register Maximum value The maximum value of the 12 will be saved Minimum value The minimum value of the 7 will be saved Average value The average value of the 3 10 12 7 3 9 66 will be saved Last value The last value will be saved 7 of the values The last value will be 7 In the case of clusters of values in graphs tables and reports the same criteria will be followed except when it is the summation of values where the sum of 3 values is shown 10 12 7 29 Units Units in which the value is expressed You can select one of the predefined units or define a new user unit Use Shows where the variable may be used in the rest of the program For more information on the digital map of numeric variables and its configuration consult the device manual 131 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 27 1 1 2 Digital variables Push the button Add or Modify the dialogue will appear to configure the binary variable New binary variable Identifier Mame Description Type Address Reading EM CC writing t Reading Writing Use Screen Events Accept Cancel Where e Identifier Allows each of the binary variables to be used in expressions and conditions can be identified see section 14 2 Expressions and Conditions e Name Name of the numeric variab
213. evice Shows the number of actual reclosures Number of reclosures configured on the device Time between reclosures configured on the device State of the device relay a Closed 6 Reset button Clicking the button resets the device 7 OFF button Clicking the button triggers the device 162 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 37 TCP50 ALARM This device does not keep a log therefore it is not possible to configure any device parameters 3 37 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options ICP50 Alarm Lue oc EE atte Device parameters Device inputs 3 3 1 1 Device parameters Click on the Device Parameters button and information will be shown about the device TCP50 ALARM configuration Device Information Peripheral number Model Identifier Alarm Description 163 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 37 1 2 Device inputs By means of this dialogue box a brief description of the device inputs can be entered for improved identification purposes Input configuration Description Description 11 ST BM X33 12 EJ Jh A AO Q WM 9 13 Er MI ww X 14 15 gt Bp 7 EM 7 gt _ gl 55 55 Description Description Description 16 26 1 27 18 28 7 13 23 20 30 ee wf Accept Cancel
214. ew 285 ModbusTCP Mame Description Converter address Port Configuration port 502 30718 sp r Advanced setup Accept Zx Cancel Where e Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the same name e Description Alphanumeric type data to enter a brief description of the device e Converter address Corresponds to the address through which the program can communicate with the device This parameter can be an IP address or a name This direction should not be confused with the MAC address e Port Corresponds to the communications port By default the Modbus TCP protocol will communicate through port 502 e Configuration port Corresponds to the communication port through which the program can configure the device This port is 30718 by default Unlike TCP2RS devices the program does not configure any Modbus TCP device parameters automatically using the configuration port only to detect and verify that the device configuration is correct To configure or assign an IP address to Modbus TCP devices consult the device manual To communicate a TCP2RS device through a router carry out the following steps 1 In the Converter Address field enter the IP router address 2 the Port field enter the communications port and redirect this port on the router to the communications device 3 Redirect the co
215. expressions min expl exp2 Return the minimum of the two expressions abs exp Returns the absolute value of the expression exp rand Returns a real random value between 0 0 and 1 0 if expl exp2 Evaluates the condition cond If the condition is true it returns the expression if false it returns the expression exp2 We should remember some details about these functions The square root function will return an error if the expression is negative The logarithmic functions log and log10 will return and error if the expression is less than or equal to zero The Arctangent function assesses a range that goes from 2 to 2 and returns zero if the expression is zero The extended Arctangent function atan2 assesses a range that goes from to rr and returns zero if both expressions are zero The Arcsine functions asin Arccosine acos Arctangent atan and extended Arctangent atan2 return the result in radiants The functions that return the number pi pi and e e have no parameters so they can be used with or without parentheses The functions are not case sensitive Examples of valid formulas are 2 pityesqrt ii0 round exp 2 2 1 2 It is also possible to use certain time functions second Returns the second of the current date minute Returns the minute of the current date hour Returns the hour of the current date
216. f the selected image If disabled it will force the image to occupy the entire length and width of the rectangle defined in the report expanding or contracting it measurements as required Alignment This will help decide on which side of the rectangle defined report sheet image will be placed 7 2 1 4 Date Control This tool allows a date to be entered in the report real or not Once this tool has been selected it will be necessary to draw a rectangle on the report by keeping the left mouse button pressed The properties that can be configured from this control are Type Free date This option enables the type of date shown on the report to be chosen The following choices are available Any date Any date defined by the user Present date The date at the moment the report is made Start date The starting date for the information used in the report Final date The end date for the information used in the report Styles Personalized We can also select the style of text created previously or create new personalised one for the date Fant il Z This corresponds to the type of font used for the text of the date Bold lei Depending on the font selected you can choose bold and or italics Size E Ei Corresponds to the size of the font of the date text The size could be between 1 and 90 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options availa
217. ferent controls to be aligned will be selected The last control selected will be that which is taken as a reference to carry out the alignment of the others i e all the selected controls will be aligned to the left at the level of the last control selected 351 Align to the right This tool carries out the same function as aligning to the left but to the right of the last selected control 7 Align top At least two controls should have been selected so this tool can be used The control enables the position to be aligned at the level of the upper section of another To carry out this adjustment the Control key should be pushed and with the left hand mouse button the different controls to be aligned will be selected The last control selected will be that which is taken as a reference to carry out the alignment of the others i e all the selected controls will be aligned at the top at the level of the last control selected 35 Align bottom This tool carries out the same function as aligning at the top but at the bottom of the last control selected 190 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 2 3 Pages tools i Add page This tool will make it possible to add a new page to the report The reports can have multiple pages with different contents Each of these pages is linked to a single report and the only common element between different pages of a report is formulae Remove page This tool will remove the page that is active when
218. fferent discriminator can be applied or modified or even no discriminator It is also possible that the equipment does not allow more than one type of graph and that there are no discriminators defined or they are not applicable to this type of graph thus this screen will not appear and will pass directly to the selection of variables of the device in question After selecting the type of figure and the discriminator the selection screen of the variables will appear Variables selection CVM144 Izquierda M Variables iil Harmonics Analog inputs Instantaneous Maximums Minimums L1 IN Phase neutral voltage Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Current Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Ind
219. ffers the same characteristics and the same function as the Save option except that this allows changes to be saved on another SCADA screen or a different report to that being edited Exit This brings the running of the programme to a finish 2 2 Set up menu Devices Device groups Discriminabars Calculated variables Styles Manager images Reports k Screen k Events timetables Groups of events Events Preferences Operating mode The main software parameters can be configured using this menu 2 2 1 Devices Clicking on this option will bring up the following dialogue Devices devices and convertors gw L Modify E Delete E Add 3 Modify Ld Delete Here a list with configured devices can be seen distributed just as they are physically connected On clicking the Accept button the software will try to configure on those converters and devices that can be configured the communication speeds configured in the corresponding advanced configuration window see section 2 2 1 3 Advanced Configuration of Devices Devices have been classified into those which have a direct connection and converters and those devices which must be connected to others so that the software can connect with them The 10 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada former appear on the list at the left of the dialogue and will be called first level devices from now on the second type can be found on the right and
220. for the discriminator calendar see 5 1 3 Calendar 209 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 2 Event groups For a better display when it comes to showing the event viewer allowing us to filter and show only one type of event the events can be classified into groups allowing a single event to be allocated to more than one group The option Groups of events from the Set up menu will allow the different groups of events to be configured Set up groups of events BHA Groups Events from the Critics group i Furnace temperature Add 3 Modify amp Delete m Add 4 Delete Accept Cancel On the left hand list all the configured event groups will be displayed while on the list on the right events that have been assigned to the group selected from the list of groups will be displayed o x Allows us to add modify or delete groups of events On adding or modifying the following dialogue will appear New group of events _ Accept Cancel Where the name of the event is entered This name will identify the group in a unique way __ 908 Allows events from the group of selected events the list of groups to be added or deleted Delete a group event will only delete it from the group and in no case will it be removed entirely from the event set up When you click the add button a list with the events outside the group will appea
221. four buttons on the left as was discussed in the section on graphs As with the tables the user can print the actual page of the graph at any time using the Print option in the Options menu of the main menu or the Print button of the upper toolbar 285 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada is also possible to export this table by clicking in the Options menu of the main menu It will be exported in text format where each line of text is a row of the table and where each column is separated by the symbol We can also sort the table by the various columns as desired for example we can sort events by duration or even by type of event and by the duration of each type as explained above in the general table properties Note that however this type of table does not have an available menu of properties that can be used to configure it However the toolbar provides some extra options that will allow us a certain degree of configuration for this type of table Next 52 Go to f Grouped by a Group wW Event o Add up Toolbar of the table of logged events There are a couple of options that allow us to filter the events that we want to see depending on the group they belong to or according to a specific event 2 el primer evento 2 Error del CVM Harm nicos D Ocupaci n preocupante Ocupaci n REALMENTE preocupante D Suceso con sorpresa 2 Suceso para contar Suceso RSS event
222. from the Set up menu Devices Device groups Discriminabars Calculated variables Styles Manager images Reports k Screen k Events timetables Groups of events Events Preferences Operating mode The following dialogue box will appear Discriminator configuration Discriminator list Discriminator 1 of discriminator 1 of discriminator 2 Type of discriminator 3 Add Modify oy Delete cid Exit From where discriminators can be added deleted or modified 168 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Clicking the right button on the mouse over the list of discriminators the following contextual message will appear Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl enabling discriminators to be pasted and copied It may be possible that some of the options from the context menu do not appear copy will only appear if there is a discriminator selected and the paste option only if the discriminators have been copied onto the clipboard If no discriminator is selected and there are no discriminators on the clipboard when the right button is clicked the context menu will not appear When Add or Modify from the dialogue box Discriminator Configuration is clicked the following dialogue box will appear Modify the discriminator Discriminator 1 Description Type of discriminator 1 3 Hour types Day types Calendar Accept 3 Cancel Mame esu EB Alphanumeric type dat
223. g the incident In this case the event will be enabled when the voltage exceeds 240 and is disabled at less than 220 tough emerging window Checking or not this box will indicate whether the incident should be reported or not If the event is reported when the program is active a pop up display will appear v Resisterinfle Checking M not this box will indicate whether the incident is registered or not and therefore may be displayed in the events browser or not 213 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Groups 1 Critics 2 Voltages Add wj Delete It shows the list of groups to which the event belongs see 10 2 Event groups Clicking on the Add button brings up a dialogue with the list of groups that the event does not belong to allowing the groups to be selected to which we want to add the event Select groups of events Groups amp Normals Accept J Cancel Using this dialogue groups are selected to which the event can be added but are not currently added In the Advanced tab the following parameters appear Modify event Mame Voltage section 24 General Advanced Mator s actions Client s actions Disable according to Associate text Business week The main voltage is upper 240 watts Delay in activating seconds 0 Delay in desactivating seconds Annotation The value is watts F Ass Publish on activating Iv Publish desacti
224. h embedded with an automatic period and with 6 values we will see a chart with values grouped by month displaying the month of the report last value and the previous five months If we choose a period that is not automatic the values represented will be grouped with the given period and only those included in the period of the report will be included For example if we make a weekly report and we have defined the period of the embedded graph as one day we will see a graph of the week s report with 188 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada the values grouped by days typically 7 values With a period other than automatic we will never see values that are not included in the period of the report in contrast with an automatic period we can see values of periods prior to the report Styles Estilo 1 Period 24 hours gt B Foreground color Transparent E Background calor DN M 35 Vp Add mm Delete Eg Calor Line Style Solid Wide Embedded Graph properties with an automatic period Once generated and displayed in the client the graph might look like this Weekly graph 232 0 231 6 gt 251 2 230 8 230 4 6 7 8 10 11 12 2008 Date 7 2 1 8 Common options for the action tools Any control entered in the report sheet can be re sized and moved re size a control just place the mouse pointer on one side of the rectangle which surrounds the control and ke
225. hannel have been enabled Earth leakage current value detected when the channel triggers If the value detected is twice the trigger threshold configured it is shown in purple Trigger current configured Delay time configured Adjustment button Enables the sensitivity and channel delay to be programmed Off button External disconnection of the channel The button will remain disabled if the channel has been triggered Reset button Push the button to restart the channel The button will remain disabled if the channel has not triggered Display units of the current values Trigger threshold value configured for the channel Pre alarm value configured for the channel Instantaneous earth leakage current value of the channel When the instantaneous earth leakage current value of the channel exceeds the limits of the values bar either by excess or default it will be indicated as shown in the figure arrow in the bar Status of the pre alarm lt gt Disabled status Triggered status Additional information on the status of the pre alarm Reset button Resets all the device channels that are triggered 54 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 5 CBS 8 3 5 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options 5 8 Driver parameters 3 5 1 1 Device parameters Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software wil
226. he E mail address of the sender and the Mail server address SMTP should be indicated and the authentication of the mail server enabled if necessary Once configured it will be possible to test if the configuration is correct by clicking on the button Check configuration on clicking this button an e mail will be sent to the sender or an error message on the contrary For information on which parameters must be entered into the mail server configuration contact your system administrator O dpud Through this option updates can be easily made on the software properties This preference will be explained in more detail in section 2 2 12 1 Updates Editing password Activate Password Repeat password The blocking possibility can be 4ctva enabled or disabled using this password on the edit mode This password should be a word with a maximum of 8 characters Authentication Activate user authentification Setup users Similarly using the Activate User Authentication the name and password of the user trying to access on a remote PC can be requested in order to allow access to some of the resources of the application and deny access to the rest of the resources The Configure users button will allow the resources that each one of authorised users can access to be configured User configuration will be explained in detail in section 2 2 12 2 2 Users If the option Save system events
227. he corresponding boxes Alarms Variable hd asinum Minimum Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 vj 240 200 0 Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 2 Voltage L2 v 0250 n 90 0 Depending on device connected if this has relay outputs they can be configured with the values desired e Variable Parameter associated to the output relay The output is programmed as an alarm controlling any of the parameters measured by the CVM K The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are indicated in brackets e Max The maximum value to control is indicated in this box e Min The minimum value to control is indicated in this box e Delay Alarm delay in seconds The maximum value is 9999 seconds Analog outputs Variable ero Fullscale Output 1 Voltage L1 vj gt 0 500 20 m m Depending on the device connected if this has an analogue output the desired values can be configured e Variable Parameter associated to the analogue output Any parameter measured by CVM K can be selected as an analogue output e Zero Value of the parameter to which the zero of the scale is assigned Full Scale Value of the parameter to which the maximum value of the scale is assigned e Type Type of input permits either 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA to be chosen 98 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 20 CVM K2 3 20 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVM k2 Dri
228. he options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits The option Device inputs only appears on DH 96 CT devices 3 25 1 1 Device parameters On DH 96 devices it will not be possible to modify internal parameters and it will be necessary to change them manually on the device keyboard For more information on how to modify the parameters see the manual that comes with the device DH 96 configuration Device Information Peripheral number Model 4 DH 36 CPM Identifier Description Voltage Current Decimal number Decimal number without decimals without decimals decimal f 1 decimal f 2 decimals 3 decimals x Cancel Device Information Peripheral number 5 Identifier Description Shows general information DH 96 configuration Device Information Peripheral number Model 5 96 Identifier Description Measured variable Decimal number Without decimals f 1 decimal 2 decimals 3 decimals Zx Cancel Model DH 35 AC 123 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Units Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the DH 96 units of measurement to be entered These units will be displayed in the data display in no case will they be sent to the device This parameter will not appear on DH 96 CT units on the DH 96 CT
229. he types of day the tariff we want to assign must be selected and thereafter proceed in the following ways e Clicking the left mouse button on one of the type of day sections marking only the section selected e Clicking the left mouse button on the initial section and then holding down the SHIFT key Click the left mouse button on the final section thus selecting all sections between initial and final Bear in mind that 103 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada both the initial section and the final section must correspond to the same type of day with this option selections will be made automatically The following dialogue will appear Quick selection Year 2008 Days Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday W Friday m W October Saturday November Sunday December Day type Day type 3 Cancel In this case every Wednesday and Friday of October will be marked as day type 3 tei Allows the calendar configuration and types of day to be loaded from a file previously saved on a disk This option is useful when it is necessary to configure the same timetable on multiple devices The calendar configuration and types of day can stored on a disk and can be loaded on another device 104 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 20 1 2 Expansion Cards Depending on the number and type of expansion cards entered into the device the options
230. hen we are on a control action since the mouse cursor will change and assume the shape of a hand with the index finger extended rather than the typical arrow t The typical action control lets you change your SCADA screen and provides a simple and intuitive way to navigate through the designed application Action controls are Screen control Report control Device control Graph table Control Active events control Event view control Execution Control Forcing variables control To ascertain the scope and detailed operation of these controls see the editing SCADA screens section All features of a SCADA screen are contained in the same and are fully dependent on the design that the user has used when defining the controls used 234 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 5 Displaying Reports Another of the prominent features of the client application is being able to see reports defined and designed in the engine editor both local and remote You can display any report defined using the menu option Views and then Reports or directly from the Report button on the toolbar It is also possible to access a particular report from a SCADA screen where a control report has been added which will aim directly to the report defined The reports consist essentially of a series of pages and each page consists of a background image which may not exist and hence be white and a series of controls placed on it The controls available i
231. iable Identifier HP Description Address Registers 0 1 Iv Save Type Format t With sign Reading f writing Decimals Reading writing Agrupatian criteria f Maximum value t Minimum value Average value f Last value f Values summation Use Screen GraphicT able Events Reports Accept Cancel 130 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Identifier Enables the identification of each one of the numeric variables to be used in expressions and conditions see section 14 2 Expressions and conditions Name Name of the numeric variable used to identify it better Description Short description of the variable Address Modbus map address of the device where the variable can be found Records Number of registers which occupy the variable on the Modbus map Save Indicates if the device value read should be saved on the value log or not Type Selects the type of variable reading writing or both If the variable is write or read write the value can be forced on the device Format Indicates the format that the device returns the variable value The value can be expressed in the 754 format with a sign and the number of decimal points can be indicated Grouping criteria Enables the grouping criteria of the values of the variable to be selected in graphs tables reports and the value to be saved in the values register For example if in the period b
232. iable used to calculate the maximum demand 88 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 17 2 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVM BD Driver parameters Device parameters y Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 17 2 1 Device parameters is not possible to configure the device when it communicated the MODBUSTCP connection This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CVM B BD configuration Device Information Transformation ratio Peripheral number 42 CVM B BD 4 sess zm Identifier Version Primary Secundary CVM BD B4DF Voltage 220 220 Description Cornet 1000 PR Energy counters Benne Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 3 am Active energy 580611 18171 Me OO Inductive energy NEN NEN ERN Capacitive energy 184837 59775 38071 OO Active energy 298012430 69632502 229368627 Unit Inductive energy oO oO oO T Capacitive energy 130414686 30307830 100200450 x Maximeter reset Load values in device meters A
233. ic as with the tem does not have a specific meaning it depends on the use of each application For the PowerStudio programme the Topic identifies the device from which information is sought For example PWSTDValues Device1 VI1 When the device name contains spaces Device 1 it must be indicated between single PWSTDValues Device 1 VI1 Item The tem is the element that the applications request phase voltage 1 frequency status of the relay etc For example PWSTDValues Device1 VI1 In appendix 14 1 Variables the expression is detailed which should be used to access the device variables 222 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 Access through the PowerStudio Client The software has a client application that will allow users to access SCADA screens reports and to display the instantaneous values being measured by devices either locally or through a remote connection Graphs can also be made access to value lists recorded by the devices viewing events seeing the status of devices etc Similarly this client application is available by embedding as an Applet on the website of the application 12 1 Web Server The communications engines acts as a Web server configured in port 80 by default It is possible to host that server in another port through the corresponding option the set up menu and Preferences submenu Preferences General Editing password H55 setup Acti
234. icate Speeds are configured to accept changes in the device screen See section 2 2 1 Devices Once speeds are configured if there have been any problems the following dialogue will appear PowerStudio Scada PowerStudio Scada has been unable to configure speed of the following devices Speed bps Gas 1 144 Serial Port 1 4 Temperature Measure DH 36 Serial Part 1 Unable to establish communication with the device Make sure the device is correctly connected op Unable to set up device speed for comunications Make sure device speed is the appropiate IF it s necessary manually modify device speed manually configure speed check device s manual Here the different devices are shown whose speeds have been unable to be configured There are two types of warnings 3 When there have been errors in communication with the device Once the problems have been resolved speed configuration can be attempted once more by clicking the button Re iry 7 When the characteristics of the device make it impossible to change speed communication The user is responsible for manually configuring the suitable speed on those devices where it is not possible to configure the speed by communication To learn how to change the speeds on the devices consult the corresponding manual 16 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 2 2 Groups of Devices Using this option devices can be grouped together
235. igital output ACTTARIFF po O O O 26 305 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 11 8 QNA The following shows the specific variables of the QNA devices the shared variables such as voltage and current have been included in the corresponding variable table 02 08 X X Xx x Xx x x x Alarm event variables will activate value 1 when an event is produced in the QNA and will remain active for 5 seconds When these 5 seconds have elapsed without any new event taking place the alarm will deactivate value 0 Voltage phasor Voltage current phasor L1 L2 L1 L3 E o f JL 15 Jp d l FDV12 FDV13 FDVI1 FDVI3 O Counter of number of 10 cycle blocks With EVQ With voltage off limits STCBE1 STCBE2 STCBE3 STCVB1 STCVB2 STCVB3 po t2 __ _ Jp X qp 3 p 1 Coefficient Coefficient Ka Voltage Voltage KDV KDA KAA NN Imbalance percentile higher than 95 All registers Valid registers UBSUPT UBSUPV Value counters Registers without Frequency Pit without events Ayers Frequency without Pit L4 L3 events NREGTOT NREGEVQ CVHZ CVHZEVQ CVPLT CVPLT1EVQ CVPLT2EVQ CVPLT3EVQ LO _ 9 60 9 Total no of registers Event log a a a E e
236. igital outputs 4 analogue outputs CVMk2 configuration Expansion card 4 Digital outputs 4 Analog outputs Digital outputs Analog outputs Output equations 1 014 02 03 04 05 06 07 09 pu 2 0910 11 12 13 14 15 16 pu 3 Q1 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 e 7E 4 pt yey geeky 8E 4 ky 0E 4 ook 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 p Alarms x Cancel Using 29194245 changes can be made between the digital outputs and the configuration of the analogue outputs of the card In the previous image the configuration of the digital outputs can be seen For more information on configuring the digital outputs consult the section 3 20 1 2 1 Digital Inputs Outputs The configuration of the analogue outputs can be seen in the following picture CVMk configuration Expansion card 4 Digital outputs 4 Analog outputs Digital outputs Analog outputs variable Value 5 m Value 5 m 1 Reactive power 0000 2 Reactive power consumed III 5 BO 3 Reactive power generated kvar 2 oo 4 voltage L1 Y j Cancel Where for each of the analogue outputs the following can be configured e Variable Permits any parameter that measures the devices that could be used for analogue outputs to be selected e Value 5 mA Value of the parameter which is assigned to the 5 mA output e Value 5 mA Value of the parameter which is assigned to the 5 mA output
237. iguration of the calendar October 1 of each year will be type 1 Selecting the days can be carried out in the following ways e Clicking the left mouse button on one day marking only the day selected e Clicking the left mouse button on the start day and then holding down the SHIFT key click the left mouse button on the end day hence choosing every day between the start day and the end day e Using the fast selection option 102 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Day types type L ra aM Day type aM Day type mE type type qi bay ipe 7 Ca bay tpe s C os ES Day type 10 mn Tariff types of day Allows the type of day to be assigned to the different tariff calendar days to be selected Clicking on the timetable with the left button of the mouse on a day will assign it the type of day selected __ P satupdey pe Allows different types of day to be configured Clicking on the button the following dialogue will appear Daily profiles configuration CVM k Tariffs Tarif C Tuin Ca C Taita Ca Tais C Taire Ca vui Ca Ca airs Accept Where the different types of day divided into 1 hour sections are displayed on the left side of the dialogue and on the right side the tariff to be implemented on that day can be selected U u a m To select the tariffs on t
238. igure Allowed allowed 144 96 DH 5 6 Accept g Cancel In this dialogue box name and resources of the profile will be added or modified depending on the button chosen This name used to identify the profile will be unique two profiles cannot exist with the same name The list situated to the left of the dialogue shows the resources added to the profile that can be used by the users who have that profile assigned while the left hand list shows the resources that the profile user does not have access to To add resources to the profile Not Permitted should be selected from the resource list and passed onto the Permitted resource list using the button whereas if we want to delete resources from the profile the opposite should be carried out select Permitted from the list and click the button to pass over to the Not Permitted list The different types of resources that can be added to a profile are Devices Devices configured on the software Visualise Allows the chosen devices to be visualized Force variables This allows the variables values of the devices to be forced Only devices where it is possible to force one or more variable can be shown for example digital outputs Configure Allows certain parameters of the devices can be configured Only devices where it is possible to configure parameters while on the execution mode will be shown
239. images relative to the control size these properties are equivalent to those available for controlling still pictures IP control camera representation in the SCADA screens editor We also have at our disposal the button refresh image that will allow us to obtain and display the last available table of the camera so that we can see if the image arrives properly and that the adjustment properties of the image are properly configured IP control camera representation with the image refreshed 201 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 2 1 11 Common options for the action tools By clicking the right mouse button on the SCADA screen it will also be possible to add controls to it In the same way the toolbars can be shown or hidden Undo Select all yw Actions w Position w Editing wv Properties Any control SCADA inserted on the SCADA screen can be resized and moved To re size a control just place the mouse pointer on one side of the rectangle which surrounds the control and keep it pressed down while moving it in the desired direction To move a control the left mouse button must remain pressed while dragging the mouse in the desired direction It will also be possible to move more than one control if they are grouped inside a rectangle The left hand mouse button should also remained pressed at the same time to group two or more controls drawing a rectangle with the control we wish to move inside it Controls enter
240. in a unique way the screen in the SCADA system New screen Accept Cancel If we select new or directly some of the already existing screens a SCADA screen design window will open 194 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 2 Editing SCADA screens For editing screens we must be in the edit operating mode By editing screens it will be possible to add change or delete screen controls These controls may show the value of a variable perform an action paint an area of the screen and so on The objective of the screen is to easily display the status of the facility allowing the situation of the different lines of the plant to be seen show electrical variables of the installation etc The elements that allow this to be achieved will be the screen controls The edit window of the SCADA screen looks like this D B S S9 BB CS Xx Ec d 3 We 6 E M 1 Show Background image 1 JE Maintain real size J Iw Maintain aspect ratio Alignment The window is divided into three areas e Tools 1 e Information panel 2 e SCADA screen 3 The tools will allow a simpler configuration of the SCADA screen design The information panel will allow access to all the configuration options of a control that is being added to the design of the SCADA screen and that is selected at that time The SCADA screen is the design view from where the con
241. indow is invalid or is not permitted This may be because it is too small narrow or wide both in window units pixels and variable units both in the X axis and the Y For example if we have a variable with a period of one hour we will not be allowed to make an extension of an area of the drawing of less than an hour on the X axis Graph CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada n E bd Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens Reports Va Graph Table y Events 3 Properties gt Print CVM144 Izquierda Voltage L1 V 15 2008 o Back o Next Goto Grouped by Period Q Server Ok 192 163 5 52 3030 9 23 03 10 30 57 AM Request to force variables sent Making an extension of an area of the drawing in the Zoom mode 254 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada By releasing the left mouse button we accept the discontinuous window as a new display window The action will be automatically executed and we will be able to see the enlarged area that we have chosen Graph CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada Er Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens Reports PS Graph Table Events ey Properties gt Print CVM144 Izquierda Voltage L1 V 1 00PM 3 00PM 5 00 PM 7 00 PM 9 00PM 11 00PM 1 00 3 00 5 00 7 00 9 00 11 00 1 00 3 00 5 00 17 2008 18 2008 Date O Back Next 12 Goto Grouped by 4 Pe
242. ing system frequency Configuration of the frequency of the operating system Trigger current 4 Box Configuration of the channel trigger threshold It will be possible to select one of the following values 0 03 A Trigger delay s FOO ms gt Enables the trigger delay time to be selected from one of the following values 158 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3s 5s E Reconnections Times Latch output polarity Reconnection sequence by leakage 10 1 10 60 Reconnection sequence by shortcircuit 2 3 2 30 S Operating mode Moraly open t Normally closed Automatic reconnection disabled Normal Cut element Shorteircuit gt It will be possible to the following reclosure parameters e Residual current device reclosure Sequence Enables one of the following values to be selected 6 8 16 30 59 115 and 224 seconds 15 minutes 8 30seconds 1 2 3 4 5 7 minutes 15 minutes 6 10 20 30 60 130 and 600 seconds 5minutes 2 4 and 8minutesfortherest_ 15 minutes 6 30seconds 1 2 3 4 8 and 16 minutes 15minutes 6 2 46 6 6and6miutes 15minutes 6 j8secondsbetweenreclosues 15 minutes The information shown will be xx yy zz where xx corresponds to the number of reclosures yy to the sequence of time and zz to the reset time e Circuit breaker reclosure Allows one of the followi
243. iour causes the non selection of the new viewing window not to affect the Y axis The combination of behaviours Clicking the Control key and the Shift key at the same time will enable us to enlarge graphs with more than one representation area a single area depending on their X axis The user can freely combine the various behaviours in successive enlargements 12 2 8 2 Pan mode The Pan mode is available when there is an enlargement carried out and it enables us to move the viewing window using the drag and drop technique When we are in this mode the cursor looks like a hand 2 Appearance of the cursor in the pan mode when it is possible to start the pan and when not As you can see the cursor will tell us whether we are on an area where it is possible to initiate the movement of the viewing window or not typically as we are out of the drawing zone To start a movement click on the left mouse button on the point of the drawing you want to use as an anchor and without releasing the button drag the mouse until we have moved the window to the desired location Note that the window moves in real time with the mouse movement 257 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada It is interesting to see that once the anchor is positioned the mouse cursor will change to tell us that we are able to move the viewing window uh Cursor indicating that we are able to move the viewing window The movement is limited by margins of the viewing window
244. iption of the units where the counter to be entered is displayed e Factor Multiplicative value of each input pulse For digital inputs Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Flow Inputs from 1 te 12 Inputs from 13 to 24 Description e Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the digital input to be entered for better identification Finally for the flow configuration Input configuration Meters Digital inputs Flow Inputs from 1 te 12 Inputs from 13 to 24 Description Unit Factor Time min Calculation window s 30 30 w Accept Cancel x EE 135 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Checking the selector will activate the flow variable Remember if the selector is not checked it will not be possible to view the flow value of the corresponding GL 24 M input e Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the flow to be entered for better identification e Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units where the flow is shown to be entered e Factor Multiplicative value of each input pulse e Time Time in minutes for calculating the flow value e Calculation window Time window in seconds that the software will use to calculate an estimate of the flow taking into account the value of the device counter 3 28 1 3 Variable limits
245. is window you must click on the axis that we want to configure and the following window will appear Force limits Force maximum Y limit Force minimum Y limit Minimum Y limit Configuration window of a shaft We can see that this window will allow us to force the limit values of the axis in its Y coordinate By default the graphic engine defines the limits which enable all the value of a variable to be shown however it is possible to modify them manually through this option In the example we are going to force the minimum Y limit value of the axis where the voltages of the phases are zero 269 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph properties V MAIN Voltage L1 Voltage L2 Voltage L3 96 MAIN mn 2 2 V THD d L1 MAIN 81 0 511 0 Current 1 1 Current 12 Properties with the minimum limit of a forced axis Note that on the axis units of the properties the units the equipment the variables in brackets belong to provided the variables are from only one device and the limits of the Y axis the minimum and maximum value in bold if this value is forced by the user can be seen Like variables axes can redistributed using the drag and drop method The operation is the same as dragging and dropping a variable So an axis can be released on another with the same units on another area or on the same area but in another position or out in the trash deleting all the variables contained
246. istortion 96 Frequency Hz Maximum demand Current Maximum demand KW Current A Neutral current Analag inputs Total distortion 36 Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Active Digital outputs Capacitive kvarCh Digital output 4 Closed Inductive kvarLh Digital output 2 Opened Maximum minimum reset Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Screen display device with off limits values As can be seen in the previous screen there are values which exceed the limits defined Similarly how some variables are selected is also shown blue background with white letters The analogue view provides approximately the same information but in a more graphic way so that we can visualize the limits defined as a bar graph 243 CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada Options Views General PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada o Previous Next v Devices Screens Reports 2 Graph 3 Table gt Events i Properties Print Phase neutral voltage V 224 1 224 1 Current A Frequency Hz CVM1 44 Izquierda 9 19 08 12 46 05 PM Distortion in voltage 0 0 Phase phase voltage V Distortion in current 96 Neutral current A Maximum demand kW 50 0 50 0 50 0 Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Device view Analogue Representation Devices providing more than one representation typically two can be exchanged with each other by selecting Properties
247. it is possible to carry out this function by way of a simple trick The procedure involves obtaining a solid rectangle or square image of the colour you like for the line this may even consist of a simple pixel image Then add an image control and assign the previous box to it Disable the fields of Maintain real size and Maintain aspect ratio and use the control to obtain the desired horizontal line and or vertical thickness desired 3 text control and write the text underscore characters and as long as needed This creates a horizontal line This method has the advantage that it allows vertical or diagonal lines to be applied by text rotation 90 or 270 degrees for vertical lines colour change and it also allows the thickness to be changed by modifying the size Diagonal Line 323 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 12 am making my first screen or report and cannot add background image or a still picture What is happening You should remember that the images that can be included on the SCADA screens and the reports must have been added previously through the image manager Therefore it is necessary before starting to design a screen or report to add the images you will need through the image manager 14 4 13 What can be counted Any event added to the system contains a variable that indicates how many times it has been enabled how many times it has been recognized how many times it has been deactivat
248. ital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated 4 21 08 8 57 56 AM Digital input 1 activated 4 21 08 10 53 08 AM Power OFF 121 08 10 55 33 AM Digital input 1 deactivated 4 21 08 11 16 32 AM Power ON 4 21 08 11 17 06 AM Power OFF 4 21 08 12 20 03 PM Power ON 4 24 08 3 45 51 PM Power OFF 4 24 08 3 45 54 PM Power ON Power OFF Power ON 4 24 08 3 46 41 PM Power OFF 4 24 08 3 46 45 PM Power ON 4 25 08 8 30 54 AM Time changed 4 24 08 3 46 23 PM o Back o Next 12 Go to f Grouped by Server Ok powerstudio cir cutor com 80 Timetable of QNA events The table has two columns the first is the date and time when the incident occurred while the second is the description of it As you can see this table does not allow the properties of the screen to be changed nor the variable period which would not on the other hand make any sense However it is possible to print it in same way as other tables Special graphs have their equivalent table and therefore we have table equivalents to harmonics graphs waveforms logged events duration of events and efficient voltage semi circle events The table of logged events has the peculiarity that for every event we can visualize a lot of information e Event Type An icon at the beginning of
249. l be Time between reclosing s Time between reclosures Type of time between reclosing f Exponential Operating mode in the time between reclosures 63 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 6 2 Displaying values The CDR 8 device will display the following screen values Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 mA ON OFF O OFF O OFF Prealarm 400 30 50 30 0091 Reconnection enabled Cannel can be latched Reset Reset Reset 200 OFF 15 25 15 Adjust Adjust Adjust Adjust Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 ON O OFF O OFF OFF 1000 30 30 30 0 088 Reset Reset Reset 500 OFF 15 15 15 248 Adjust Adjust Adjust Adjust Reset History Where Channel 1 Channel 2 10 1 Channel status Status ON Pre alarm status O Status OFF 2 Relay status 2 140 jE 4 Reconnection enabled KS ON Channel not latched OFF Channel latched 3 Channel operating mode Earth leakage Mode Relay mode O ER c 30 OFF Cannel can be latched Adjust 10 11 12 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Additional information on the status of the channel Pre alarm Pre alarm enabled Reclosure Channel disconnect
250. l read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CB5 B configuration Device Information Peripheral number 2 CB5 8 Identifier Version 5 8 5 60 Description Device Configure prealarm of prealarm relay Normally open t Normally closed gt Synchronize clack Prealarm threshold 90 Defined values Current Delay time s Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel E Channel 7 Channel 8 Description of relay output Channel 1 C Normally open Marmally closed of toroid Number of reclosures 30 w G W GS 0 Trip threshold 4 Time between reclosing s 10 05 of time between reclosing Delay time s Normal Instantaneous Exponential Accept Cancel 55 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number Model 2 CB5 8 Identifier Version CB5 8 5 60 Description Shows general information Device w Synchronise clock This selector allows the equipment to have the channel reclosures enabled not Depending on whether the reclosures of the configuration fields of the channels are enabled or not Clicking on the button Synchronize clock the present time will be sent to
251. lanation will appear on the lower part of the screen Disctiminated variable Ifthe button is clicked all the variables will be selected or deselected 165 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Select variables wg arables 11311 Harmonics Instantaneous eeren Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Current Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Inductive power Apparent power Power Factor Cosine phi Maxinum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy Discriminated variable lt lt Le Le Le eap ta SQ S c s xl Is Is Is Is Lele lt 1 lt 1 I Il I lt 1 lt 1 I lt Xl lt 1 lt 1 I lt I E pe ps de de do E SE EE pl I xl XI 1 XI I XI XI 4 If you click on one of the stage buttons if ef w only the variables for this stage will be selected or deselected Select variables vw wg arables 11311 Harmonics Instantaneous O ee Phase phase voltage Distortion in voltage Frequency Current Neutral current Distortion in current Active power Capacitive power Inductive power Apparent power Power Factor Cosine phi Maximum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy Discriminated variable 5 A E S al d lt 4 E Gi EL E pe peo ise aalala
252. larm threshold 2 70 Pre alarm threshold equipment possesses This can vary between 50 and 100 of the minimum trigger threshold of the device channels Operating system frequency 50Hz t 60 Hz Enables the frequency of the working network where the device is connected to be selected Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Description Reconnection sequence 8 pn 16 1 16 1 59 1 115 1 224 1 300 m Trigger current A Trigger coil output polarity 3 fe Standard f Positive Trigger delay s Instantaneous Shows the channel configuration Channel 1 Channel2 Channel3 Channel4 As it is only possible to display the configuration of one channel at a time click on one of the channels to display the corresponding configuration Description Alphanumeric type information where a brief description of the channel can be entered for easy identification 51 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Trigger current 4 03 the maximum current that can be reached by the device before triggering The values that can be acquired are Disabled 0 3 A 6 ba ha 804 1 To 30 A Trigger delay s Instantaneous 3 Fl Channel delay time the possible values are Trigger coil output polarity f Standard Positive Configuration of the polarity of the output relay of the trigger coil allowing one of the two possib
253. larms Variable Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 vj Im jo Maximum Miniman Delay Alarm 2 Voltage L2 v 0 0 10 Analog outputs Variable ero Fullscale Output 1 Current L3 A Im Output 2 Active power L1 jo 0 g Cancel 89 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number Model 42 CVM B BD 4 Identifier Version CVM BD Description Shows general information Transformation ratio Scale Low Primary Secundary Voltage 220 i 220 Current n 000 e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The primary voltage value should be between 1 and 500000 V and the secondary between 1 and 999 In addition the primary divided by the secondary must be less than 9090 e Primary of the current transformer This is the primary current value the device has It can value between 1 and 10000 A The secondary current is 5A in the CVM K M aximeter Period n Window type Fired Active power Ax Maximeter reset e Period Is the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes Type of window Type of window used to save the maximeter value it can be fixed or sliding e Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power 111 apparent power Ill or current III e Maximeter reset When the button is enabled the device ma
254. late Energy counters Reset On clicking the button the energy counters on the device will return to zero Alarms Variable Maximum Miniman Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 v 100 50 1 Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 2 Voltage L2 v 50 0 0 This section shows the configuration of the relay outputs of the device and the option is given to configure them with the desired values e Variable The parameters associated with the relay are indicated in this field The output is programmed as an alarm and can control any of the parameters measured by the CVM 96 The brackets show the units used to express the maximum and minimum values of the alarm In this box the maximum value to control is indicated e Min In this box the minimum value to control is indicated e Delay Alarm delay in seconds The maximum value is 9999 seconds 87 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 17 CVM B BD 3 17 1 Connection with Modbus TCP The CVM B BD devices can connect on MODBUSTCP connections with some limitations PowerStudio can read the values measured by the device but cannot read the configuration Although itis not possible to read the configuration for the correct visualisation of values PowerStudio needs to know certain information about the device This information should be entered by the user and it will be the responsibility of the user to ensure that the data corresponds to the device connected If this
255. lbar The following is the options menu Options LM50 Driver parameters Device parameters alllr dee Device inputs T Variable units Variable limits 3 30 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC LM50 TCP configuration Device Informatian Peripheral number Model Identifier Version 114 Description Meters 19 4294967040 20 65555 141 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Infarmatian Peripheral number Model 1 Identifier Version W114 Description Shows general information Meters Nu E Hm 3 0 19 4294967040 29 0 33 0 49 0 10 0 20 65555 30 0 40 0 50 0 Iv Load values in device meters This part of the configuration corresponds to the device counters If the selector is checked on sending the configuration the counters which have been modified will be loaded with the values entered into the corresponding boxes 142 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 30 1 2 Inputs For each of the LM50 TCP inputs three variables will be available a digital to show the input status open closed a
256. le of the equipment must be between 1 and the corresponding value from the following table Maximum value _ 110V 99 999 Current transformation ratio This is the primary current value the device has The value can be between 1 and 10 000 A The secondary current is 5A on the CVM 96 minutes M aximeter Period Window type n 5 Fixed Unit Active power x M aximeter reset Period Is the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 Type of window Type of window used to save the maximeter value it can be fixed or sliding Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power lll apparent power current IIl or phase current depending on the device 116 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Maximeter reset When the button is enabled the device maximeter goes to zero Voltage Single phase neutral t Compound between phases Selecting the type of voltage calculated Backlight time 1 0 Seconds Configuration of the backlight disconnection The value should be between 0 and 99 seconds Distortion calculation t THO Effective value D fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion that the device will calculate can be configured Energy counters Reset On clicking the button the energy counters on the device will return to zero Alarm Variable Maximum Minimum Delay 1 Moltage L1
257. le options to be selected standard or positive Reconnection sequence semen 1 59 TL TIS 24 m T Enabling the channel reclosure sequence to be selected The information shown will be xx yy zz where xx corresponds to the number of reclosures yy to the sequence of time and zz to the reset time 52 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 4 2 Displaying values This part can be observed in the operation mode Run using the Java Client to visualise it Channel 1 Channel 2 C xx Pratection state Protection state 0 03 0 5 Reconnection enabled Id 0 03 Id 0 5 amp Adjust Adjust td Instantaneaus td 500 ms 0 015 0 25 0 200 Channel 3 Channel 4 Frotection state Protection state e TRIP 0 410 1 OK 0 3 Reconnection enabled 0 15 Id Id Adjust td 750 ms Adjust td 500 ms 0 5 0 300 OFF Prealarm state O ur Reset In which Channel 3 Channel 4 2 4 1 0 Protection state A 0 372 Protection state a 0 3 Jel 5492 7 Prealarm state Ol 15 16 Reset 1 Relay Status Correct O Tripped 2 Protection status e Correct Channel not tripped 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Toroid error An error has been detected in the connection with the toroid coil e Trip Channel tripped Re connection enabled Informs that the reclosures for the c
258. le used to identify the variable better e Description Short description of the variable e Address Modbus map address of the device where the variable can be found e Type Selects the type of variable i e read write or both If the variable is write or read write the value can be forced on the device Use Shows where the variable may be used in the rest of the program For more information on the map of binary variables and its configuration consult the device manual 132 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 28 LM 24 M This software only communicates with LM 24 M devices 3 28 1 Driver options The options of the LM 24 M can be accessed from See Menu See section 2 4 3 Display options e Toolbar See section 2 4 4 Toolbar The following is the options menu Options LM24 Driver parameters Variable units Variable limits 3 28 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC LM 24 configuration Device Information Peripheral number LM 24 M Identifier Version 124 19 Description Meters if 133 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number Model
259. lication the localisation of the application required to be carried out In the parameters field the parameters necessary are written for the execution of the external application using the arguments configured in event see section 10 3 1 Arguments 219 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 3 2 3 Sending Mail This action can only be done on the communications engine It enables an electronic mail to be sent to the selected addressees New action send mail Message Assistant Mail address Add Accept Cancel In this dialogue the message to be sent in the mail is entered The format of this message is similar to the event annotation see section Event set up allowing any of the arguments configured in the event to be used To facilitate entering the message the wizard can be used by clicking the button At the bottom a list of recipients to whom the mails will be sent appears For more information on how to configure the mail server see section 2 2 12 Preferences 10 3 2 4 Show a device This action can only be done on the client application In conducting the action the client application will automatically display the selected screen monitoring device 10 3 2 5 Show a SCADA screen This action can only be done on the client application In conducting the action the client application will automatically display the selected SCADA screen 10 3 2 6 Show a report This actio
260. loading data from the device at this time A Error in connection The connection where the device can be found presents problems H Device not started up Attempts were being made to establish communication with the equipment at this time for the first time This process is necessary initially to ascertain the configuration of the equipment Failed communications Unable to establish communication with the equipment response time is exceeded e L Incorrect version The equipment communicates correctly but it is a version which the programme does not support Perhaps it is an old version VV Phase error The equipment communicates correctly but some phase connection is incorrect B Channel error Unable to open the communication port This action must be carried out to establish communication with the device Failed communications Some of the devices connected to this equipment do not communicate properly e Camera transmitting images The engine is receiving images from camera as customer application is requesting them Camera paused The engine is not receiving images from camera as they not being required by any client application Error on the memory card The SD Memory Card is invalid write protected or not present The information found on the right side of the window 38 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Driver parameters y Variable units 2 Device Cy
261. m options available on this menu It is possible that the user is viewing engine data from a PC that is in a different time zone to that of the engine By default the data is shown referenced to the time zone where the client application is running local but from the client application in particular the Time Zone option of the General menu we can change this configuration to show the data referenced to the time zone where the engine is remote ET Toolbar ET Statusbar ET Allarm if it doesn t communicate Events actions G Connect Local ki Logout Selection of the time zone If the engine time zones and the client application coincide the option will not appear 232 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Devices status PowerStudio Scada Options Views General e Previous Next Devices Screens ge Graph GMODEUS RRM C Pedraforca Puerto serie 1 Er CVM E Armanicos Device 144 Name CVM144 Izquierda Description CVM144 Izquierda Peripheral number 5 server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 View of the status of the device with the Windows application aspect The About option provides general information about the client such as the version manufacturer etc 233 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 4 1 1 1 1 Displaying SCADA screens One of the most important features of the client is its ability to display SCA
262. mage see section 7 2 1 3 Date Control see section 7 2 1 4 Formula control see section 7 2 1 5 Conditioned control Operates in the same way as conditioned control in the reports but also lets the IP camera control be added see section 7 2 1 6 e Configure formulae see section 7 2 5 In the date control please note that it is not possible to select nitial date and End date as they are meaningless on the SCADA screens 8 2 1 1 Screen control This tool will allows us to include access on the SCADA screen on the SCADA screen The properties than can be configured from this control are Screen EX 1 Here the destination screen which will be accessed by clicking on the control entered on the SCADA screen will be specified 197 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 2 1 2 Report control By selecting this option the control will become direct access to a previously defined report see Chapter 7 The options available are Report Report 1 Here the report will be selected to be displayed by clicking on the running mode control Grouped by pos The type of group for the data to be displayed in report can be chosen If the User Defined option is selected the following fields will appear From 06 10 2008 16 36 00 Where the period is specified from when the report can be viewed 8 2 1 3 0 Device Control By selecting this option the control will become a direct acce
263. mages in another group proceed in the same manner as with the copy of groups by Clicking CTRL before releasing the left mouse button Eliminate i images When clicked the selected image will be automatically removed PowerStudio will delete the copy created and will not delete the original stored on the PC Display the image by clicking twice on one of the images Visualizing image UNIFIL 48 01 A MEDIDA CUN CLARE BU EHM 13 v A 1 1 1 5 2 2 Reports Using this option reports can be added modified or deleted This section will be explained in more detail in Chapter 7 2 2 8 Screens Using this option the different screens that make up SCADA can be added modified or deleted This section will be explained in more detail in Chapter 8 25 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 2 9 Events Timetables This option allows us to configure the different disabling of events timetables This section will be explained in more detail in Chapter 10 2 2 10 Groups of events Using this option event grouping can be configured This section will be explained in more detail in Chapter 10 2 2 11 Events This option is used to configure a series of events in the software configuring a disable timetable for the event or carrying out a series of actions when the event comes about while it is active and when the event finishes This section will be explained in more detail in Chapter 10
264. mal f 2 decimals f 3 decimals current variables are shown with 3 decimals 43 The precision when displaying the variables is selected Accuracy C without decimals 1 decimal Accuracy without decimals 1 decimal 2 decimals 3 decimals Accuracy Without decimals f 1 decimal The units in which the variables are shown are selected In this case all the current In this case all the PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 1 3 Variable limits Configuracion limites atencia Arm nica w P se PF ene ill r Tensi n fase neutra Alarma Prealarma Nominal Prealarma T T Minimo v Maxima Tensi n fase fase Alarma Prealarma Nominal Prealarma Oo EO 0 P Lj Minimo v Maxima r Frecuencia Corriente Nominal Prealarma Alarma D n PO A M ximo 5 Corriente de neutro Nominal Prealarma Alarma oo wn gp A Maxima M xima demanda Alarma Prealarma Nominal Prealarma Alarma Nominal Prealarma Alarma Minimo Maxima A Distorsi n en tensi n Distorsi n en corrente Nominal Prealarma Alarma Nominal Prealarma Alarma I E i 5 Maximo 5 5 Maxime 72 p Cancelar Using this dialogue nominal values of the variables are configured as well a series of margins to display on screen when a variable measures unusual values Phase neutral voltage Alarm Prealarm
265. mission to see this type of event and you have checked the notify and or register box If the incident appears not to have carried out actions that have been defined check what has actually occurred in the list of events If the event has still not produced the programmed action or actions check that the equipment upon which it should have acted is on and communicating correctly Should the action involve the running of an external application check that the said application is properly installed and that the command and parameters are correct you can put this action in a run control in a SCADA screen test to see if it behaves as expected 14 4 7 can t paint the graph correctly What is happening If the graph appears to have dots missing verify that this is not because the variables are being represented with different periods If the bar charts has widths that are not correct ensure that the values are separated by the distance marked by the driver period For example if a device saves data every 5 minutes and we change the period to 15 minutes the bars will be superimposed when displaying the bar graphs for the values prior to the change of period every 5 minutes If we change the period to a lower value the bars prior to the change will appear narrower than necessary In any case the bar graphs of values separated by the distance shown in the Driver registration period will always appear correctly If you do not see any values whe
266. n a report are as follows Text control Image control Date Control Control formula Conditioned control Graph Control To know the scope and detailed operation of these controls see the editing reports section The information provided by a report is always related to a period of time and will only be updated in response to changes in this period by the user via the lower toolbar DDEnglish PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Q Previous v g Devices Screens Reports 2e Graph Table e Events Weekly report Important information Data reisted to structura integration o gt o ue t Weekly graph Data A Data B Data Data D 7 2 Grouped by Zoom Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Report View Unlike a SCADA screen in a report there are no active controls that react to user actions so that interaction with the report reduces the options available in the menus or toolbars especially the lower toolbar which is typical of this type of view 235 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada o Back o Hext k Goto o Grouped by Pages Zoom Toolbar for reports From the toolbar we can access the page of the report we want using the Pages buttons This option does not appear if the report consists of a single page Page 1 2 Page 2 B Pages Pages Menu Each page of the report can be expanded or reduced by the Zoom but
267. n be executed in the Windows Linux Unix Mac or OS X environment The client can be executed both as a local application AppletScada jar and in the form of an embedded applet on a downloadable web page directly from the address where the engine editor is installed In this last case browsers such as Internet Explorer version 6 0 or later Mozilla Firefox version 1 5 or later Opera version 9 or later and Netscape Browser version 8 or later can be used It is possible however that the client application works on other browsers or on previous versions of the officially supported browsers The client application is designed with a similar philosophy to that of a web browser This means that the program manages a series of views or web pages on a browser maintaining them on a list and enabling access to the same in different ways Options Views General Previous Nex g Devices 9 Screens Reports P Graph mus Properties crcuror OFFICE CONSUMPTION POWERSTUDIO Parameters Value Graph Voltage Current Active power Power factor THD U THD f Energy zs n e Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 80 As be observed on the previous image the client mainly consists of 4 differentiated areas the uppermost menu bar the toolbar directly below it the active view the centre and the status bar on the lower part On the title of the window the name of the view is being visualised at that momen
268. n can only be done on the client application In conducting the action the client application will automatically display the selected report 10 3 2 7 Sound Alarm This action can only be done on the client application On conducting the action the application will emit a bleep 220 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 4 Event Variables Each of the events has an associated number of variables that can be used in SCADA screens reports graphs and tables Using these variables it will be possible for example to know the status of the event on a SCADA screen or the number of activations of the event in a report The number of variables associated with each event may vary depending on whether the event is reported or is stored in the event log The event variables will be coded for use in formulas and expressions such as R EVE_variable name Using the RSEVE prefix the program will ascertain that this is an event variable rather than a device variable This codification can be used in formulas graphs and tables although in the case of reports graphs and tables only the variables of those events that are recorded on file can be displayed To obtain more information about the event variables see section 14 1 14 Event variables 221 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 11 DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Any Windows based application which has DDE functions can establish Dynamic Data Exchange links with PowerStudio The DDE D
269. n of the PLT are complete Harmonic value record lt fieldARM gt lt id gt lt id gt lt element gt lt harmonic gt lt harmonic gt lt value gt lt value gt element lt fieldARM gt 319 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Variable identifier device variable Element Registers from each of the harmonics harmonic Harmonics number value Harmonic value e Waveform value record fieldFO lt id gt lt id gt lt element gt lt msec gt msec Value lt value x element lt fieldFO gt Variable identifier device variable Element Information from each of the points that make up the waveform msec millisecond value value EVQ event Record fieldEVQ lt id gt lt 1 gt value value phase phase duration duration averageValue averageValue previousValue previousValue eventType eventType lt endForced gt endForced gt lt semicycleVoltage gt lt date gt date lt value gt lt 7 value gt lt semicycleVoltage gt lt fieldEVQ gt Variable identifier device variable Value Value of the event Phase Phase in which the event occurs duration Duration of the event in milliseconds averageValue Average value previousValue Old value eventType Type of event Oointerruption 1 gap
270. n the communications engine and for client application however depending on the action it will only be possible on one of them According to the state of the event the actions are divided into e On activating These actions are executed only once when the event is enabled e While active While the event is active it will continuously execute this group of actions Caution must be exercised in configuring actions because they are running continuously they may block the system or connected devices e deactivating These actions are executed only once when the event is disabled When acknowledged These actions are executed only once when the operator recognizes the event This group of actions will only be available when the event needs to be notified By adding an action in the engine the following dialogue will appear Help to create an action What action you want to add Force one variable Execute an external programme Send mail 4 Cancel Whereas if you want to add an action to the client the following will appear Help to create an action What action do you want to add Execute an external Show a device programme Show a scada screen Show report C Bb Audible alarm x Cancel As can be seen actions that can be made by the engine are different from those that can be made by the client application Bear in mind when adding actions where we want to carry them out Once the action h
271. n you think there should be ensure that you have not zoomed in an area without values or that the Y axis is not forcing levels for values which do not exist 14 4 8 The Paint Pot is not working correctly What is happening If when placing the paint pot control on a SCADA screen this does not behave in the manner expected ensure that 1 The condition or conditions defined are right for each colour 2 area in which the control is positioned has a uniform colour It is possible that the area where the paint pot is positioned has different coloured dots but with very similar tones which at first sight appear the same The paint pot control only spreads through identical colours 3 The area to be filled with the colours defined in control is not part of another control The paint pot control only interacts with the screen background and does not take into account any of the other controls Do not attempt to use the paint pot to fill for example an image by way of the image type control 322 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 9 Can I launch external applications from applet For security reasons Java Applets have some fairly significant limitations with regards accessing the resources of the local machine on which they are running One of these restrictions is being able to run applications on the local machine Nevertheless this restriction may be disabled by adding the following line to the Java policy permissions fil
272. nce selected click the name with the left mouse button Within the same father group the names of the sons cannot be repeated but it is possible to repeat the names of groups in different father groups _ Delete caeooy Clicking this deletes the group selected as well as all the sons categories It will be possible to delete any group except the root group It will also be possible to add or remove categories clicking the right mouse button on the group you want to add a son group or on the group you want to delete The menu corresponding to the selection of the desired action will appear H 7 Energy 1 General screens 1 Secondary screens New category Delete category Lastly it will be possible to move or copy a particular group For this you must click on the left mouse button over the group you want to move or copy 23 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada i 17 Energy General screens Secondary screens 1 1 Secondary screens 1 Switch Without releasing the mouse button drag to the destination group H 17 Energy General screens Seconda screens 1 Switch 14 Secondary screens 1 If you only want to move the group you should release the left mouse button for the change to take place i Energy 1 General screens Secondary screens Secondary screens 1 1 Switch If on the contrary you want to make a copy of the group Click the CTR
273. nch external applications from applet eese eene nnne eene nnns 323 14 4 10 How can I see the applet from a machine which is not running 323 14 4 11 How can I draw a line in a report or a SCADA screen DE 14 4 12 I am making my first screen or report and I cannot add a background image or a still picture Whatis MM UM a a os ae 324 14 4 13 Wiara De Con eA oett oe abdo ead essi aou eU O d 324 14 4 14 I would like to export the report data in order to process it later How can I do it 324 14 4 15 I tried to make a table with the client application and I get the Message Table too Big What CUI A dO TO SEO TE watt tem ot coelestia i 326 14 4 16 How cand suudatea control o coded 927 14 4 17 How do Il add animation on the 327 14 4 18 How cam sun late dJeyeleontrol de e E Re ADHI etes DARENT NEU 326 14 4 19 How can I change the properties of control in accordance with a condition 326 14 4 20 How can T knowdhe status Of E e tas REESE RE FO ACC EQ A sao vd deus 229 14 4 21 How can I display documents from SCADA 329 14 4 22 How can I obtain an event according to the status of a
274. nes or points For scatter type representations we can select between dots circles 5x5 squares 5x5 diamonds 5x5 X 5x5 Crosses 5x5 Xs 3x3 and Crosses 3x3 Also for the line representation the style can be chosen solid dashed dotted line dot and line dot dot as well as thickness between 1 and 10 points The most important parameter apart from the variables to be represented and that will determine the final aspect of the graph and most importantly the amount and distribution of information to show is the period of time The period can be automatic 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 1 day and 1 month In the event that the period is automatic we can choose the number of values of the variables that make up the graph we want to see There is a fundamental difference between choosing the automatic period or any other period lf we choose the automatic period the data will be grouped with the period of the report and if we have generated a report for one week we will have variable values to be represented in the embedded graph grouped in weeks so that for the week we are generating the report we have a unique value It is therefore necessary to choose those values with the group we want to visualize that is for example indicate how many weeks generally periods we want to see these periods are always prior to the period of the report Thus if we generate a monthly report with a grap
275. nfiguration port on the router to port 30718 of the converter N B For information on re addressing ports consult the user manual There are some second tier devices that when connecting to a Modbus TCP device require manual configuration the communication is limited to the mere display for Modbus TCP these devices cannot be configured Devices of this nature are CVM B BD 74 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada CVMK CVMK HAR The special characteristics as well as the pertinent configuration to carry out correct Modbus TCP connection are specified in the corresponding sections of each device e Parameters By clicking the button a dialogue will appear where a number of parameters of the device can be configured Device configuration 5 Modbus E IF address 132 168 Netmask 255 25 D Gateway 80 0 Automatically obtain IP address j x Cancel Where P address Corresponds to the IP address through which we can communicate with the device Subnet Mask Corresponds to the subnet mask used on the network where the device is connected Predetermined Gateway Corresponds to the address of the gateway in the case that the device is not on the same network as the computer containing the program Obtaining an IP address automatically DHCP This option will be enabled when we want the device to automatically receive the IP address via a DHCP server
276. nfigured to store data every so long typically in periods of 10 or 15 minutes Through this option it is possible to indicate that we want to see data with a different period which must always be higher than that defined by the device Note that this does not change the configuration of the device which will continue saving with the period configured from the engine editor but will group the data to a certain extent to simulate the fact that the device was programmed for that period Note that there is an Automatic option this option indicates to the program to choose the period that best suits the selected grouping Automatic 1 minutes 2 5 minutes 2 10 minutes 2 15 minutes 2 20 minutes 2 30 minutes 2 1 hour D 24 hours f Period Period selection menu Note that there are special graphs where the last two options Grouped by and Period are meaningless and therefore not available 262 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 8 6 Graph properties It is possible to configure many more aspects of the representation using the properties option of the graph This option can be accessed through the menu Options submenu Properties or directly through the button Properties on the main toolbar Suppose we have made a graph of the variables of the three phases of the voltage and the voltage distortion in phase one and the phase one and two current of the QNA measuring equipment The client will pro
277. ng the button from where we can configure these parameters Mew R5237 485 Mame pe Description em Part Advanced setup Accept Cancel Clicking on the Advanced setup button enables the configuration of these additional parameters Advanced setup Delay 0 milliseconds This is the time that will wait for the answer fram device alzo known as Timeout Communication speed Automatic 38400 bps 4800 bps 57600 bps 9600 bps 115200 bps t 19200 bps Accept Cancel Depending on the device being configured some of these parameters may not appear 15 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada e Delay Value in milliseconds This value known as Timeout is used to control the time that software will await the response from a device The value entered will be added to the default waiting time for a response from the device e Speed of Communication Allows communication speed between the software and the device to be selected This speed is automatically assigned by default but it may also be forced to the desired speed If configured as automatic this means that the software will try to configure the devices at a maximum speed common to them all If on the contrary a specific speed were selected the software will configure the devices at this speed and what may occur is that devices unable to communicate at that speed no longer commun
278. ng values to be selected 2 o fminutebetweenrecosues 30minutes 2 o fminutebetweenreclosures 60 minutes 2 90 seconds between reclosures 30minutes 2 90 seconds between reclosures 60 minutes The information shown will be xx yy zz where xx corresponds to the number of reclosures yy to the sequence of time and zz to the reset time e Cut off element Lets the type of cut off element be selected from one of the following values 159 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Circuit breaker Circuit breaker trigger coil Polarity of the locking relay output Operation mode 3 35 2 Displaying values 3 35 2 1 1 RGU 10 The RGU 10 device will show the following screen values Where li cod 10 11 12 13 14 Pratection state 12 o Prealarm state 5 4 Reconnection enabled 6 Id 0 03 9 Adjust td Instantaneous 11 edo Protection status Not tripped Tripped Additional information on the protection status Leakage current value detected in the trigger channel This information will be visible only when the channel is tripped Status of the pre alarm Not enabled Pre alarm enabled Additional information on the status of the pre alarm Additional information on the pre alarm reclosure This will only appear when the automatic reclosure of the pre alarm is enabled Information about the configured trigger c
279. nly if groups have been previously copied to the clipboard If there is no group selected and there are no groups of variables calculated on the clipboard when clicking the right mouse button the context menu will not be visible By adding or modifying a group the following dialogue will appear New group of calculated variables Mame pe Description Accept Cancel Where the name of the group of calculated variables and brief description should be entered for better identification within the software If you want to add or change a calculated variable this dialogue will appear 176 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada New calculated variable Identifier EE ERU Mame m Description Units Sst Forcible variable Agrupatian criteria Accuracy Maximum value Without decimals 1 decimal 2 decimal 3 decimal Minimum value Average value Last value Malues summation Formula Furnace 1 11 Screen Graph Events Reports Table Accept 3 Cancel That will permit the configuration of the calculated variable Identifier Allows each of the calculated variables to be used in expressions and conditions see section 14 2 Expressions and conditions Mame Name of the calculated variable used to better identify the variables Description Allows a textual description of the calculated variable to be entere
280. o the PC where the search engine is running from where a series of sons nodes which represent the equipment connected to the device are rooted 238 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Devices status PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Oo Previous Next F LJ Devices Screens Reports 2 Graph Table Yo Events dm Properties 6 192 168 1 52 1 44 Izquierda GMODBUS RRM C I Alemania I chicago Pedraforca amp Puerto serie 1 CVM kK CVM KArmonicos Device CVM 144 Name CVM144 Izquierda Description CVM144 Izquierda Peripheral number 5 Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 View of the status of the device per connection Each node has an icon which represents the status of the communications of the equipment Thus we find the following states are possible e The equipment communicates properly Downloading of the device We are downloading data from device at this time Error in connection The connection where the device can be found presents problems Device not started up Attempts were being made to establish communication with the equipment at this time for the first time This process is necessary initially to ascertain the configuration of the equipment E Failed communications Unable to establish communication with the equipment response time is exceeded El Incorrect version The equipment communicates correctly but it is
281. obe Acrobat Reader 14 4 25 How can communicate with a TCP2RS converter by way of a router To communicate with a TCP2RS converter located in a sub network different to the network in which the software is located we can use a router as shown in the following image a s u wi IP 192 168 120 201 IP 192 168 15 205 The TCP2RS converter should be added as follows Mew TCP2RS Name Coversor 2 5 Description Coversor 2 5 Converter address 1 92 165 120 201 Port Configuration port 10001 30718 ey Setup c Advanced setup Accept Cancel 1 Enter the router address 192 168 120 201 In the Converter Address field 2 Redirect the port 10001 380718 in the router to the converter address 192 168 15 205 see router manual 330
282. of hours will be added to the discriminator Fram 18 Ea 0 zal 22 0 E zal 4 Numerical selection of a time zone Representation 0 Graph of the time zone Each column represents one hour of the day each row is a period of 15 minutes For the slot selection proceed as follows e Click with the left mouse button on the start of the time zone e Without releasing the button drag it until the end of the time zone e Release the button and the time zone will have the colour for the time of day E The zone can be defined manually in a numerical way but this is only useful if one wants to accurately define any slot precisely in minutes for instance a zone from 10 10 to 15 40 This dialogue only allows a continuous time zone to be defined 173 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 5 1 3 Calendar Once the types of days that will make up the discriminator are defined they will then be distributed in a complete calendar To this end the types of days created beforehand in the discriminator process will be distributed on these calendars Time discrimination Year 2008 Summer day Day types enero febrero marzo abril WP lun mar mi jue vie z b dom lun mar mi jue vie z b dom lun mar mi jue vie s4b lun mar mi jue vie s b do a a A F 5 1 4E gt J 10 1 13 oe r bs B 7 menm day lun mar jue vie z b dom lun mar mi jue vie z
283. olbar or the equivalent option in the Options menu after which you will get the following dialogue Ss Show for connection LJ Show for device Selection of the device status tree organisation 240 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Devices status PowerStudio Scada Options Views General z Previous Next L Print XT Modbus TCP 192 168 1 52 E Serial port g Puerto serie 1 e CVM K Armonicas Generic MODBUS GMODBUS Camera IP cy Device 144 I Alemania Name CVM144 Izquierda Ch Description CVM144 Izquierda Pedrafarca Peripheral number 5 RRM C Server Ok 192 163 5 52 8080 Status of the devices organized by type of device 12 2 7 Displaying a device The client application can visualize all devices in real time Thus each device provides one or more overviews that allow the status and values of the same in real time to be ascertained This view can be accessed through the menu option Views and then Devices or directly from the button Devices in the toolbar In both options the user should search through the device tree 0 Devices gt _ CIRCUTOR BARCELONA gt ACTIVE FILTER Events J Calculated variables EARTH LEAKAGE PROTECTION 5 gt 7 Devices status i MAIN REGULATOR iL quaLITY NETWORK __ SUB ELECTRICAL PANELS AIR CONDITIONING 1 A
284. on node or on the node you want to delete Clicking will bring up the corresponding menu to select the desired action H Group 1 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 1 346 New group Group 2 Delete group 1 Group 2 1 1 Group 2 2 Lastly it will be possible to move or copy a group For this click the left mouse button on the group you want to move or copy 17 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 1 Group 1 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 1 Group 2 1 1 Group 2 2 Without releasing the mouse button drag the group to the destination father group Group 1 1 Group 1 1 Group 2 1 Group 2 1 El Group 13 If you want to move group just release the left mouse button for change to take place Group 1 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 1 Group 2 1 Group 2 2 lar oup 1 3 If on the contrary you want to make a copy of the group click the CTRL button and without releasing the left mouse button the cursor will change indicating that will be made of the group 34 2 Group 1 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 2 1 Groupe 2 i Group 1 3 Finally release the left mouse button of the mouse to make a copy of the group Group 1 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 1 2 1 Group 13 Group 2 1 Group 2 1 Group 2 2 If you try to drag a group which is not possible to copy or move the cu
285. only 2 quadrants the consumed energy counters will be taken into consideration and with 4 the consumed and generated energy quadrants Active output Wh pulse 0 Variable Active Consumed Configuration of the output relay of the active energy The number of Wh equivalent to an output impulse and the variable that will be a measured to give this pulse If the pulse value is 0 the output will be treated like a standard digital output enabling its value to be forced from to 1 Reactive output pulse 0 Variable Inductive Consumed f Capacitive Consumed Inductive Generated f Capacitive Generated soe icu Configuration of the output relay of the reactive energy The number of VArh equivalent to an output pulse and the variable that will be a measured to give the pulse can be configured If the pulse value is 0 the output will be treated like a standard digital output enabling its value to be forced from 0 to 1 147 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Input configuration Operating mode Input 1 Input 2 nur Mode Mode igital inputs f Pulses State Pulses State Pulses meters Pulses number Pulses number Reset 99 999 99 999 Configuration of the digital inputs of the device Operating mode Tariffs Digtalinputs inputs may be used as inputs for changing the tariff or as digital inputs Consult the device manual for more information on how changing
286. ontext menu of the button bar This menu is accessed by clicking the right mouse button on the toolbar H Previous button H Next button H Devices button H Screens button F Reports button F Graph button Table button H Events button HM Properties button 4 Print button Toolbar setup menu On this menu we can define what buttons we want to show and hide N B You may hide the toolbar completely through the main menu option within the General menu There is a possibility of hiding the menu bar using the option Enable menu and toolbar in the Preferences option of the engine editor Using this latter method it will not be possible to make it appear again from the client application 230 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 4 General options of the client application The client application has some general options that allow enhanced customization as well as the configuration of some general aspects These functions are accessed through the General menu of the application Toolbar Statusbar Allarm if it doesn t communicate Events actions b UG Connect Logout 2 Language 2 Look and feel General Menu The options toolbar and Status Bar permit as discussed previously respective bars to be shown or hidden The option of Alarm if doesn t communicate indicates whether the client application should make an audible alarm sound when the engine is communicating or not Typically
287. option Then in the event that the values resulting from the formula were not reached the remaining number of decimal places with be filled with zeros 186 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Thousand separator display a thousands separator in the value resulting from the formula This separator will depend on the regional configuration of the system where the programme is running Formula Empty cell _ Here the formula that will give place to the result to be shown on the report sheet will be specified It can be entered manually or using the wizard _ see appendix 14 2 1 Wizard for the creation of expressions and conditions 7 2 1 6 Conditioned control This tool will allow us to include both a control and the previously defined data text label image formula date in the report that will be shown only when compliant with a specific condition The properties that can be configured for this tool will depend on the type of control which has been chosen Control type label ts The common options are Condition Here the condition is specified which gives rise to the appearance on the report page of the chosen control It can be entered manually or using the wizard see appendix 14 2 1 Wizard for the creation of expressions and conditions o bnw _ rme Once the condition has been specified click the New button and the condition will be added to the condition list To delete a
288. or the option corresponding to the context menu Magnifying glass Mode Enables the area under the mouse cursor in a separate window to be amplified This mode is accessed through the F4 key or the option corresponding to the context menu Zoom mode Pan mode D Tooltip mode 2 Magnifying glass mode Undo last zoom Without zoom Context menu of a graph 253 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 8 1 Zoom mode The zoom mode allows us to make extensions on a portion of the drawing area with the mouse When we are in this mode the mouse cursor looks like a magnifying glass Er Appearance of the cursor the zoom mode when it is possible to start Zooming when not As can be seen the cursor will tell us whether we are on an area where it is possible to start a graph expansion or not typically because we are outside of the drawing To start an enlargement click on the left mouse button on the drawing point we want to be one of the corners of the new viewing window and without releasing the button move the mouse to the point of drawing we want to be the opposite corner of that window It is interesting to see that while moving the mouse discontinuous lines indicating what will be the new viewing window will appear if we release the button Equally the cursor informs us whether the window we are selecting is not valid as a new viewing window by changing the appearance of the mouse cursor i R The new viewing w
289. ore elaborate interactions enabling adjustments and more complex configurations by clicking on a button through a specific configuration window For example RGU 10 type devices allow current triggering values and trigger delay to be adjusted 24 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Operating system frequency Prealarm 50 Hz Prealarm threshold 96 Disabled Trigger coil output polarity Standard Prealarm relay output polarity Standard Trigger current 0 03 Activation delay 0 75 s Trigger delay Operating mode Recoverable RGU 10 parameter adjustment window From the monitoring view of a device it is faster to make a graph or a table either through a direct button in the view itself as in the case of QNA equipment or directly by clicking on the corresponding buttons on the toolbar This second option will be explained in the following section 12 2 8 Making graphs One of the most powerful tools of the client is the possibility of making graphs of the variables of the equipment trends This view can be accessed through the menu option Views and then Studio and finally Graph or directly from the Graph button on the toolbar Graphs can be made from a predefined SCADA screen where the graph control has been added or as commented in the previous chapter from the buttons defined for this purpose in some types of device monitoring views e g on the monitoring view of a QNA Typically to make a graph the vari
290. ould for example make a report of the first 5 days of a month or the first 6 hours of a day and so on Irrespective of the period over which the report is made the user can scroll to the previous period or next if any this is done using the buttons Back and in the toolbar below Thus if we are grouping by day the button Back takes us to report the day prior to the current one or if we are bringing together a week the Next button will take us to the report for the following week The user can print the actual page of the report at any time using Print the menu Options of the main menu or the Print button of the upper toolbar Note that this option unlike the SCADA screens is enabled for reports 12 2 6 Displaying the status of devices The client application offers the opportunity of checking the status where communications are concerned of the devices connected to the engine editor both local and remote The view of the status of devices can be viewed through the menu option Views and then Status of the devices It is also possible to access this view using the status bar by clicking on the icon that indicates that there are errors in communications only when there are incidents This view consists of a tree which details the status of all the devices connected to the engine editor The default representation of this tree is a series of father nodes that represent the equipment connected directly t
291. overvoltage An overvoltage will start when the voltage threshold value is exceeded and will finish when it is lower than the value defined by the difference between the threshold and the hysteresis Gap threshold Serves to programme the gap detection Each semi cycle with an efficient value not reaching this defined value will be understood as a gap Gap Hysteresis Will define a gap hysteresis so that the initial voltage is different to the end of gap voltage A gap will start when the voltage does not exceed the threshold value and will finish when this is lower than the value defined by the sum of the threshold and the hysteresis Threshold interruption defined as power off absence of tension interruption the voltage drop below the value set Hysteresis interruption A hysteresis of interruption is when the start up voltage is different from the voltage interruption end An interruption will begin when the voltage does not exceed the threshold value and ends when it exceeds the value defined by the sum of the threshold and hysteresis interruption Energy Capture period min 15 Enables us to specify the energy capture time expressed in minutes 155 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 35 RGU 10 RGU 10 RA 3 35 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options RGU10 e Driver parameters Device parameters 3 35 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configur
292. owerStudio Scada 6 Calculated variables There are certain situations where it is necessary to obtain the results of an operation between the variables of the different devices for example the sum of energies PowerStudio has this type of feature available for the so called calculated variables The values of these variables will be the result of formulas comprising variable values from other devices or other calculated variables For a better organization the calculated variables will be divided into groups of calculated variables Calculated variables Groupe of calculated variables Variables for the group Energy Description Identifier Energy Total consume Consume of all devices energy Forzable Voltages PA Add PS Modify Ba Delete Add BR Modify Delete w Accept 3 Cancel Through this dialogue the groups will be defined and the variables calculated that can be used in the software The list situated on the left contains the different groups of variables calculated while the list on the right will show the variables calculated from the selected group By clicking the right mouse button on the list of groups the context menu will appear Copy Ctrl C Paste Ckrl v Allowing calculated groups of variables to be copied or pasted It is possible that some of the options in the context menu do not appear copy will only appear on the list if a group has been selected and the paste option o
293. ows general information Password Enable password Password Repeat password Allows the password to be enabled or disabled to lock the keyboard configuration of the Period Window type n 5 Fined Active power M aximeter reset Period 15 the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes Type of window Type of window used to save the maximeter value this can be fixed or sliding Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power 111 apparent power current or current by phase depending on the device Maximeter reset Clicking on this button sends the device maximeter to zero Alarms Variable Maximum Miniman Delay 1 voltage L1 V 100 0 0 Variable Maximum Miniman Delay Voltage L2 V 1240 220 0 This section shows the configuration of the relay outputs of the device and the option is given to configure them with the required values Variable The parameters associated with the relay are indicated in this field The output is programmed as an alarm allowing any of the parameters measured by the CVM 144 to be controlled The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are in brackets Max In this box the maximum value to control is indicated Min In this box the minimum value to control is indicated Delay Delay in seconds of the alarm The maximum value is 9999 seconds 82
294. pe information where a brief description of the channel can be entered for easy identification Trigger current A 03 H Indicates the maximum current that can be reached by the device before triggering The values that can be acquired are I30 Trigger delay s aes Channel delay time the possible values are 1s 3s Ms Trigger coil output polarity f Standard Positive Configuration of the polarity of the output relay of the trigger coil allowing one of the two options possible to be selected standard or positive Enablereclosing f this option is selected when triggering takes place the device will try to reconnect the channel 50 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 4 1 1 2 CBS 4 RA CBS 4 configuration Device Information Configure prealarm Peripheral number p 41 CRS 4 RA Prealarm threshold 70 Identifier Version 5 4 1 1 Operating system frequency Description T 50Hz 60Hz Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Description Reconnection sequence 8 1 16 1 16 m 59 1 115 1 224 1 900 Trigger current A Trigger coil output polarity 3 Standard Positive Trigger delay s Instantaneous Accept Cancel Device Information Peripheral number Model 4 CB5 4 Identifier Version 5 4 1 1 Description Shows general information about the device Configure prealarm Prea
295. pects 324 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada i h 45 155 45 187 15 052 15 41 e gt 118 731 15 052 118 731 T4 207 15 41 45 155 45 187 15 052 11 013 15 41 g 118 731 45 187 15 052 15 41 118 731 TA 207 gt Values nl asd o qualite RADET Copyrigh The Boom safare Weekly graph 232 0 Data related fo graph 251 amp Data 1 325 232 Data B 1 335 230 8 Data C 1 334 230 4 amp 7 8 q IG T 12 Data D 1 334 Oct 2008 Date Report generated The report is grouped by day in particular we are viewing October 12 It shows that there are a number of values in red inside boxes the first value on the top left corner corresponds to the variable CVM 2 VI1 K To see that value through a HTTP XML petition to the server we can do the following http 192 168 5 52 services user records xml begin 10062008220000 end 11062008220000 p eriod ALL var CVM K 2 VI1 This request if carried out with the browser will return something similar to the following gt http 192 168 5 52 services user records xml begin 10062008220000 end 11062008220000 period AL Windows Internet Explorer http 192 168 5 52 services user records xml begin 10062008220000 end 11062008220000 period ALL var CVM 20K 202 VI1 X Per i dir f http 192 168 5 52 services user recor
296. point Units ero Ty D 1 junit 0 1000 420mh 1999898 2 junit 0 100 D 20m 99 99 junit 0 10 4 2 m 1949994 e Variable This indicates the name associated with the analogue input e Units This indicates the type of units the variable represents e Zero Value of the parameter to which the zero of the scale is assigned e Full scale Value of the parameter to which the maximum value of the scale is assigned Type Input type allows input 0 20 mA 4 20 mA or 0 10V V to be chosen depending on the device e Decimal point Position of the decimal point Only if the device allows us to display the analogue inputs with real measurement values 8 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Distortion calculation f THD Effective value t D fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion that the device will calculate can be configured Earth leak age current t 30A Using this the leakage current of the device can be configured Only for those devices that can measure leakage current Energy counters Reset On clicking the button the energy counters on the device will return to zero Neutral current Transformation ratio 2 Configuration of the transformation ratio of the neutral current Only for those devices that can measure leakage current 84 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 16 CVM 96 3 16 1 Driver op
297. pper area this is a text describing the graph we are viewing Typically we find the name of the devices which form part of the variables we are viewing They may contain several lines of text so that they can be represented as subtitles e Areas of representation These are areas where data can be viewed Typically a graph usually consists of an area as in the previous example but there may be several each under the following area Each area contains some common characteristics o Key Provides general information about the variables that are represented in the area This information is often the colour of the variable the type of representation the title of the graph and in some cases a value indicating some feature of the variable for the current representation for example it is typical to see on energy variables the accumulated value of all the visible values o Provides information on the units of the variables that are represented in this axis and the range of values that are being displayed At first the range is calculated so that they fit all the values of all the variables included in this axis Typically an area has a y axis although this may be modified by the user as we shall see later o X axis Typically this is the time axis and is located at the bottom of the representation area Here the time interval being represented can be seen Usually predefined time intervals are represented day month etc But the user
298. presents the evolution of the voltage in a short space of time in semi circular intervals These screenshots are made in response to the capture of an event at that time Very similar to the waveform graph with the only difference being that the x axis consists of dates as in a standard graph as the semi circle value capture takes place just at that moment 279 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 9 Making tables Another important client tool is the possibility of making value tables of the variable on a piece of equipment To access this view we can do it through the menu option Views and then Studio and finally Table or directly from the Table button in the toolbar You can make tables from a predefined SCADA screen where a control table has been added or from buttons defined for this purpose in the monitoring view of a device for example the monitoring view of a QNA Typically to make a table it is necessary to choose what variables from which devices will be part of it The selection of these variables is done in the same manner as for generating a graph After making the selection we get a table like this Table Date time MAIN Voltage L 1 V MAIN Voltage L2 V MAIN Voltage L3 V MAIN V THD d L1 05 PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous Next v Week 39 22 septiembre 2008 23 septiembre 2008 Date time MAIN Voltage L1 V MAIN Voltage L2 V MAIN Voltage L3 V MAIN V THD d L1 96 lunes 22
299. r where the events to be added can be selected 210 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Select events ul Main voltage Voltage section 24 ul Voltage section 31 Accept Cancel 211 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 3 Event configuration To add modify or delete events the Events option from the Set up menu should be selected The following dialogue box will appear Events set up Events ul Furnace temperature Mn G Main voltage Voltage section 24 ul Voltage section 31 UR Add 9 Modify QR Delete Accept Cancel Where configured events are shown the disable timetable whether it will be notified and finally registered Clicking the right mouse button on the list of events the context menu appears Copy Paste Ctrl Allowing events to be copied or pasted It is possible that some of the options in the context menu do not appear copy only appears if there are any events selected and the paste option only if these events have been copied to the clipboard If no event is selected and there are no events on the clipboard on clicking the right mouse button the context menu will not appear Clicking Delete will delete the events that are selected in the list of events By clicking Add or Modify a new event will be created or an existing event amended The following dialogue box will serve to create or modify an event 212 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada
300. r that containing data e Next Allows access to the next interval of data Typically the interval of data following this is based on the grouping of data and if we grouped data by weeks on going to the following interval we will see the data from the following week being displayed There are types of graph where grouping does not make sense since they are viewing values of a specific date for example in QNA harmonics graphs in this case by clicking on this option we will see the data corresponding to the date immediately after that containing data Go to Lets us look at data within a time interval defined by the user There are graphs where it makes no sense to specify an interval and what it permits is to indicate the exact date that we want to see graphic harmonics in QNA From date From time 5 4108 1 2 00 00 AM To date To time 8H 1 08 1 2 00 00 AM Interval selection of the data to be visualized 261 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Date Q 23 08 ki 11 20 00 Dialogue selection of date to be visualised e Grouped by Allows us to change the grouping of data The grouping is just the interval of data we want to visualize Typically there are five predefined groupings day week month quarter and year O Day Week 2 Month Quarter Year f Grouped by Selection Menu Grouped by e Period Enables the period in which we want to see the data to be specified Each device can be co
301. re deleted from the editor This option is only enabled if there is at least one control selected on the editor NO 3 2 Using this option the controls selected are copied onto the clipboard Unlike the option the controls are not deleted from the editor This option is only enabled if there is at least one control selected on the editor 2 3 3 Paste Using this option the controls previously copied from the clipboard can be pasted onto the clipboard This option is only enabled if the clipboard contains valid controls for PowerStudio 2 3 4 Delete Using this option the selected controls are deleted This option is only enabled if there is at least one control selected on the editor 2 3 5 Select All Using this option all the SCADA control screens or a report can be selected 36 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 4 See Menu Back Devices Options w Toolbar w Status bar About PowerStudia Scada 2 41 1 Back This option allows us to go easily to the previous screen 2 4 2 Devices Clicking on the devices will open a screen similar to the following PowerStudio Scada File Setup Edit View LJ Die Factory Gas 2 Serial Port 1 Gas 1 Gas 3 Temperature Measure 3 Screen E Reports C Options Driver parameters y Variable units Device 144 Mame Gas 1 Description Feripheral number 1 Device parameters r
302. red as well as the size of the report sheet we are detailing Page options Dimensions Paper type Dind 2102297 mm Grid Horizontal grid rnm 3 0 Vertical grid mm 3 0 x Cancel The size of the report sheet is selected from a list of standards for types of paper DIN A4 A3 A2 etc and the size of the grid will specify in millimetres the distance between one point of the grid and another either horizontally or vertically 181 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada In terms of tools there are several grouped together depending on their use Action Tools 9 Position Tools IE ES EE 8 e 35 Page Tools d 8 2 zl Zoom Tools wx Various Tools Sx H Edition Tools We eA 8 1 0 7 2 1 Action tools 7 2 1 1 Select controls This tool allows the user to select one or more controls that have been placed already on the report sheet to edit their properties or to apply any other tool To select a control just click the left mouse button over it To select more than one control hold down the left mouse button and draw a rectangle covering the controls we want to use The controls outside of the rectangle remain unchecked or cease to be selected if previously checked The behaviour of this tool can be amended if we hold down the Control key or the Shift key If when selecting the Controls we select the Control key what happens i
303. red during a period of time organized according to their duration This graph has some special features e X axis The X axis represents the duration in milliseconds e Representation Interval The events of a time interval configurable by the user are represented e Toolbar The toolbar allows us to move through the time intervals as well as defining a new time interval either pre defined or fully configurable by the user e Representation The representation chosen by default is in dots although it can be changed at will e Tooltip is typical to see in such a figure a special tooltip indicating the number of values of the variable that there are just at this point and between which values it can be found as it is normal that many values are repeated with certain duration e Subtitle Unlike the harmonics and waveform graph the subtitle here will tell us the time interval we are viewing e Adding new variables Only variables of the type we are viewing can be added i e duration of events Another unusual graph is that of logged events 277 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada k Graph QNA QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER PowerStudio Scada A bd Options Views General o Previous v g Devices Screens Reports Va Graph Table gt Events 3 Properties gt Print QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events History L1 Events History L2 Events History L3 Nominal voltage L1 Vn 9696 Nominal voltage L2 96 Vn 9696
304. release the variable on any area even on the same area but in another position on an axis that has the same units as the variable that we are releasing even within the same axis but in another position or out i e between areas on the first zone or under the last If we release the variable on an axis with the same units the variable will be added to that variable in the order in which we have entered it The order in which they are placed is the order they are painted so that the last variable of an axis is that which is painted in the last place and therefore that which will be represented on the others and therefore can hide the others It is often useful to place the variables representing bars in the first place because otherwise they will almost entirely hide the others If we release the variable on a zone a new axis will be created in this area This new axis will share the drawing area with the other axes of the area and will be painted in the order in which they have been released If we release the variable outside an area will be created with an axis in that position It should be borne in mind that if the variable was the only one on the axis that axis will be removed and if moreover that axis was the only one in your area that area will be removed as well We can also drop that variable in the trash at the bottom of the graph properties screen this action deletes the variable of the graph In the example we
305. riod e Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 9 23 08 10 30 57 AM Request to force variables sent Graph with the enlargement of a specific area The process can be repeated as many times as desired provided that the system permits it Enlarging enables the Pan mode that we shall see later as well as the options of Remove the last zoom and Without zoom in the context menu The option Remove the last zoom allows us to return to the previous enlargement namely the display from where the present enlargement took place while the option of Without zoom allows all enlargements to be done away with in one go Enlarging a chart with several display areas is worth commenting on If we make enlargement on a graph of this type it can be seen that areas marked off with dashed lines in the display area can be observed but they also appear in other areas too selecting the same interval X usually time 255 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Ving Ce renner SRI oo eee Options Views General O Previous v g Devices Screens E Reports 24 Graph Table P Events Properties Print CVM144 Izquierda CVM 2 CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L1 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L2 V CVM1 44 Izquierda Voltage L3 V CVM K 2 Active energy T1 689 5 kWh CVM144 Izquierda V THD d L1 96 CVM1 44 Izquierda V THD d L2 12 00 AM 2 00 AM 4 00 AM 6 00 AM 8 00 AM 10 00 AM 12 00 PM 2 00 PM 4 00 PM 6 00 PM 8 00 P
306. rm date Only if the type of synchronism is by internal clock A date for the device will be configured so that the device warns when a change must be made in the tariff calendar Calendar Only if the type of synchronism is by internal clock Allows tariff calendar by which the device will be governed to be configured u Tariff configuration CVM k2 Y ear zm Day types e s hda enero Febrero marzo C type lunmarmi jue vie jue vie zabdorr lunmarmi jue vie zabdorr lunmarmie jue vi aM Dap type mE Dap type aM type CDU Day ype mayo junio julio agosto lunmarmi jue vie jue vie zabdorr lunmarmi jue vie zabdorr lunmarmie jue vie zabdo Dap type E Dap type Hi Dap type octubre noviembre diciembre s 51 Day type 10 cr setup day type In this dialogue the tariff calendar configured on the device can be seen Each day of the calendar will be marked with the colour of the type of day assigned lunmarmi jue vie jue vie zabdorr lunmarmi jue vie zabdorr lunmarmie jue vie s4bdo Due to the fact that the device can be configured only 365 days in a year the days will be shown as from the current day for this reason the image begins on June 3 2008 and ends on June 2 2009 That is if October 1 has been configured as type 1 red while no changes are made in the conf
307. rower Studio Options Views General Previous Next oy Devices Screens Reports 24 Graph Table yp Events 38 Properties Print CVM1 44 Izquierda ES E Pagina Qi Herramientas 9 29 08 9 59 24 AM Instantaneous 4 Maximums 5 Minimums 111 L1 L2 L3 Voltage Power Active KW Phase neutral V 2212 iiia ii Inductive kvarL Phase phase V 0 0 0 0 0 0 Apparent KVA Power factor Total distortion Cosine phi Frequency Hz 50 0 Maximum demand Current Maximum demand KW Current A Neutral current A Analog inputs Total distortion 96 Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Energy Analog input 3 Active KWh Digital outputs Capacitive kvarCh Digital output 1 Closed Inductive kvarLh Digital output 2 Opened Maximum minimum reset Server localhost 8080 6 2 Client application embedded as applet the application web page 225 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 Client The client is in charge of viewing all the information generated by the communications engine and the resource editor The client is an independent programme of the platform as it is implemented in Java and therefore it can be executed in different environments as long as the Java Virtual Machine is installed in the 1 6 0 version or later Similarly the client ca
308. rsor will change to to indicate that the action is not permitted The right part of the dialogue is formed by the device list that belongs to the group selected from the tree For easier identification the name of the group is indicated in the list description Group 1 group devices Advice Clicking the button will bring up the following dialogue box 18 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Add devices to group BHA Devices Temperature Measure Accept Cancel Here a list of configured devices which do not belong to the group will appear Click on the Accept button and the devices selected from the list will be added to the group Likewise once the devices have been added to a group it will be possible to change them easily to another group or copy them by selecting them and then clicking the left mouse button when on the selected devices 3 El Group 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 1 2 1 Group 13 Group 2 1 Group 21 1 Group 2 2 Without releasing the left mouse button drag to the target group 3 21 Group 1 Group 1 1 1 Group 1 2 1 Group 13 Group 2 Cc Group 2 Gas 3 Finally release the left mouse button for the change to take place 3l 2 Group 1 1 Group 1 1 SB 1 Group 1 2 1 Group 13 Group 2 c 1 Group 2 2 If you want to copy the devices to another group proceed in the same manner as with
309. s Corresponds to the address through which the program can communicate with the device This parameter can be an IP address or a name Port Corresponds to the communications port e Type of image returned by the device We can choose between displaying a video in MJPEG or a still picture e Refresh each image Only needs to be set when it is a fixed image and it dictates how often in seconds the program should ask to obtain a new image e Route Request Corresponds to the request that must be made to the device to obtain the video or image requested 47 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada e Search By clicking on this button the program will try to find the device at the address and port configured using the most frequent routes requests For more information on which route or request should be used consult the device manual or contact your distributor 48 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 4 CBS 4 CBS 4 RA 3 4 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options 5 4 zz m Driver parameters Device parameters 3 4 1 1 Device Parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC 3 4 1 1 1 CBS 4
310. s with or without a background image incorporating display control turning the PC into a powerful and versatile synoptic panel of the installation The aim is to generate an application consisting of one or more screens which can run autonomously in the appointed facility A standard application would consist of a main screen which will serve as a basis for others that will appear according to the given requirements The number of screens is only limited by the existing PC conditions where the program is running 8 1 Add Remove screen To create modify or delete screens in the SCADA Click the screen option in the Setup menu Several options will appear depending if SCADA screens have been previously created Devices Device groups Discriminabars Calculated variables Styles Manager images Reports k Events timetables Fi Groups of events P2 Events Preferences Operating mode As can be observed in the figure the option New will appear which will enable a new screen to be created followed by the name of the screens that have been created until the present if there are any Clicking the right mouse button on any of the screens already in place this will lead to options for modifying names and removing the screens Mew Modify name Pz Delete screen In the case of selecting the New option a window will appear where the name of the new report to be created can be chosen This name will identify
311. s that the selection we are making will be reversed i e we select the Controls that are not selected and we will no longer select those which are If we hold down the Shift key what we will do is add controls that have not been selected to those which already have been 7 2 1 2 Text control This tool will allow the inclusion in the report of fixed text chains Once this tool has been selected it will be necessary to draw a rectangle on the report by keeping the left mouse button pressed The properties than can be configured from this control are Styles Personaized i We may choose a text style created beforehand or create a new personalised one Font ial correspond to the font type used for the text Bold liic Depending on the font selected you can choose bold and or italics Size IE El Corresponds to the size of the font The size could be between 1 and 90 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available Orientation degrees lt Corresponds to the text direction The orientation expressed in degrees could be between 0 and 350 The size can be either keyed in or selected from the dropdown menu which shows the options available E Clicking on this allows the text colour to be selected 182 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Basic colors SS EE Eee eee BEEBE
312. s the final second in the current period of the report endminute Returns the final minute in the current period of the report endhour Returns the final hour in the current period of the report endday Returns the final day in the current period of the report endmonth Returns the final month in the current period of the report endyear Returns the final year in the current period of the report Both for the expressions and the conditions reference can be made to device variables added to the system To make reference to one of these variables its name must be entered between the square brackets and The name of a device consists of two parts separated by a period the left side is the name of the device and the right part is the variable code of the device to consult variable codes allowed consult the corresponding appendix for each device Some examples are 2 CVM144 VII CVM 1 2 CVM 3 In some parts of the program it is possible to apply a discriminator to the variable that is to see the value of said discriminated variable in accordance with a calendar This is possible for example in reports or graphs and only in some specific variables such energy variables In order to refer to the discrimination of a variable we should indicate to the left of the variable the name of discriminator plus the extension XDCT followed by and the type of hour we want to access
313. selector is not checked it will not be possible to view the flow value of the corresponding LM4I 40 M input e Description Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the flow to be entered for better identification e Unit Alphanumeric type data which permits a brief description of the units where the flow is shown to be entered e Factor Multiplicative value of each input pulse e Time Time in minutes for calculating the flow value e Calculation window Time window in seconds that the software will use to calculate an estimate of the flow taking into account the value of the device counter 139 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 29 1 3 Variable limits LM 4 limits setup Pre alarm Pre alarm Alarm Nominal Alarm _ eee Sats i Sen 1 eee iem ena Se Minimum hd asinum Accept Only limits can be defined for flows that are enabled Through this dialogue the nominal value of flow type counters as well as a series of margins to display on screen when a variable measures unusual values can be configured The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 140 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 30 LM50 TCP 3 30 1 Driver options You can access the LM50 TCP options from e See Menu See section 2 4 3 Display options Toolbar See section 2 4 3 Too
314. selves however if you need to define calendars we recommend this should be done first and so that they can be then assigned to the events when creating them for the first time In the same way if you sure which groups of events are to be configured they should be defined before creating the events so that they can be assigned directly on creating each event 205 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 1 Events timetables For each event a disablement timetable can be defined In this timetable the time zones will be marked where the event will not be taken into account If you do not want to disable the events you can go directly to 10 3 Event configuration The zones in which the event will not be taken into account will be shown in the timetables Unless otherwise indicated zones are not configured the event will be taken into account and the program will monitor the status of the event assessing the condition configured in the event To configure the events the option Events timetables from the Setup menu should be clicked The following dialogue box will appear Timetable set up Timetables General Calendar S Work day mee Work week Ma Add fu Modify tg Delete wf Accept Cancel Where the different timetable zones are shown 3 different types of timetable can be configured gt Daily The disable zones for one day are configured Weekly The disable zones for one week are configured
315. sentation Add x Modify Delete Accept Cancel How the configuration of the types of day works is the same as explained for the types of day for discriminators see section 5 1 2 Types of day with the difference that there are no different types of hours but rather the timetable interval is established without taking into account the events zones marked in red when showing the day 207 10 1 2 Weekly PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada This type of timetable corresponds to one week In the events selecting this week type disable zones will be the same for every week of the year Modify timetable Name Business day Monday Day type Business day 23 12 43 22 14 21 15 20 16 19 45 17 qi 10 2 Friday Day type Business day 11 04 2 Mame Business day Tuesday Day type Business day 11 81 10 2 8 3 8 4 14 15 Accept Wednesday Day type 23 12 43 qr U 1 22 14 2 10 21 15 8 3 2n 16 8 4 19 45 17 gS Saturday Day type Weekend day 1 04 23 12 43 2 Business day Beli Thursday Dap type Business day 23 12 43 it te 22 14 21 15 20 16 19 4g 17 23 12 43 14 Sunday Day type Weekend day 11 04 23 12 13 10 2 22 8 8 Y Alphanumeric type data which enables the weekly type to be uniquely identified within the events timetable Monday Day type Business day
316. sentation the variables are graphically represented by bars as 228 8 L1 2248 229 0 Here the instantaneous value maximum and minimum values are represented v1 231 f Analog Y2 24 2 vizi Tet Text mode representation the variables are represented as Phase neutral v 228 2 229 6 229 7 Capture period min N5 _ In this field the capture period is entered in minutes This indicates the time interval which elapses between the registers stored of the device Save data in directory as defaut Checking this option will indicate that the data read from the devices will be stored in the default directory where the software saves all the data Should you wish to store the data in a directory other than this default directory this option must be unchecked and the directory entered into the Data directory field Data directory C D acuments and Users D atos de programa CireutarsPewe d Search Should you wish to store the data in a different directory than the default one this area displays the directory where such data is stored Clicking onc Bee will change the data directory Default discriminator E None gt This selector will assign a default discriminator to the device This option appears only in those devices possessing variables that can be discriminated If we select a discriminator when making graphs or tables the variables are displayed initially as discriminated although i
317. shold 2 90 Interruption threshold 10 Energy Capture period min 15 Password Repeat password Commentary ICIRCONTROL QMA2 Overvoltage hysteresis 2 Sag hysteresis 4 2 Interruption hysteresis 2 Za Cancel PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Information Peripheral number 0 412 Identifier Serial number 412 0354511023 Description Version BB 09 Shows information on the device Password Enable password to read Enable password to write Password Password Repeat password Repeat password uM Allows the password to be enabled or disabled to block both the reading and writing values and the configuration of the device Configuration Capture period min 1 Primary voltage Secondary voltage f Primary current Secondary current n 5 Primary neutral current Secundario de comente de neutra 5 5 Nominal voltage v frequency Hz 230 50 Circuit Connection Three phase Triangle 3 threads f Aron Star 4 threads Capture period Configuration in minutes between records stored on the device Primary voltage Device primary voltage value Secondary voltage Device secondary voltage value Primary current Device primary current value Secondary current Device secondary current value Neutral primary current Device neutral primary current value Neutral secondary current Device neutral secondary voltage v
318. ss to the screens that show the variables of a device The options available are Device Fumace m Using this drop down menu the device will be selected whose variables screen will be displayed on clicking on the control in the running mode 8 2 1 4 Graph Table Control Using this option the control will be used to make a graph or a table of one or more variables from one or more devices The options available are Style selection 5 a choice between graph and table Type sed Choose the type of graph or table you want to see Grouped by The type of data grouping to be displayed in graphs or tables can also be chosen Period Automate n the same way the period can be specified for the samples for graphs or tables 9 bette _ Here the variables that are represented by a graph or a table can be added By clicking the button add the variables that you want to add can be selected Once selected the variables will appear on the list and be deleted by the button eee 198 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 8 2 1 5 Active Event Control Through this option control will become a short cut to the display window of active events 8 2 1 6 3 Event Viewer Control Through this option control will become a short cut to the display window of the events stored in files The options available are Group Cites will correspond to the group of events on which regi
319. ssible to enter contracted power manually but if the device is IEC we Head powers enabled it can also be read directly from the equipment by clicking the button Configuration of contracted powers CIRWATT Ed Contracted power Contract 1 Contract 2 Contract 3 Tariff 1 2 3 4 Tariff 5 Tariff 5 Tariff 8 Tariff 9 B Head powers Ax Cancel 68 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 7 3 Displaying Contracts The CIRWATT device shows the following screen when viewing a contract w Instantaneous Jf Contract LJ Contract 2 X Contract Active energy Active energy Inductive energy 13 Capacitive energy 20 Inductive energy 3Q Capacitive energy 40 78 000 11 000 6 000 150 000 74 000 0 000 3 000 14 000 35 000 0 000 1 000 4 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 887 000 11 000 10 000 169 000 Where 1 Corresponds to the information of a new contract rate 2 Marks the active rate of the contract 3 Marks the active quadrant Y contacti f f contracts Selecting the various tabs the desired contract can be shown As indicated in section 3 7 2 1 Driver Parameters it is possible to select which contracts we want to view and the tab corresponding to the hidd
320. sters will be filtered Grouped by Week type of grouping may also be chosen for the data to be displayed in the events viewer ddu The list may be displayed either complete or not 8 2 1 7 Run Control This tool will allow us to include access to another application present in the system in the SCADA screen The properties than can be configured from this control are Program Here the complete route of the application will be specified which will be called up on clicking on the control entered on the SCADA screen For example C WINDOWS SYSTEM32 CALC EXE Parameters This will specify parameters if needed to be added to the application call indicated in Program 8 2 1 8 Force Variable Control This tool will allow us to force the value of the variables that can be forced as in equipment with digital outputs The properties than can be configured from this control are Variable Empty cell _ _ Here the variable at which the value will be forced is specified It can be entered manually or using the wizard see appendix 14 2 Wizard for the creation of expressions and conditions variable Myr __ sheds bette Once the variable has been specified Clicking the New button will add this variable to the list of forced variables To delete a variable from the list just select it or push the Delete button All variables on the list when clicking on the control in the
321. t General Menu 290 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 13 System Requirements e Microsoft Windows versions 2000 Service Pack 3 2003 Server XP Home XP Professional Service Pack 1 and Vista for the engine editor all in the 32 bit versions e Java Virtual Machine JRE 1 6 0 or later for the client application local and Applet e PC Pentium III or greater e 256 MB RAM Minimum 512 MB Recommended e 200 MB free hard drive depending on the number and type of equipment connected space should be increased at a rate of approximately 20 MB per device and year of data we want to save e CD ROM e SVGA monitor 1024x768 or bigger e Windows compatible mouse and keyboard In multi user systems Windows NT 2000 and XP the software will only work properly if installed as administrator or user with administrator privileges In 64 bit systems software does not support some features such as the discriminators or events timetable 291 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 Appendices 14 1 Variables In order to use references to the variables measured by devices in Scada reports charts and tables it will be necessary to know the encoding used by the software for each of them The basic encoding comprises the device name and the variable code separated by a dot name variable In this way the software will know which variable is involved and which device should be asked for the value of the said variable
322. t The menu bar contains all the options available on the client application browsing through the views direct access to them general options etc The toolbar contains fast and direct access to the most important options at any moment The present view contains the visualisation of the active resource at that time whether it is a SCADA screen a report the status of the devices etc The status bar contains general information on the application indicating the status of communications 226 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada with the server engine editor the status of communications with the equipment the active events etc 12 2 1 Status Bar The status bar of the client contains general relevant information about the application such as the status of communications with the server engine editor Server powerstudio circutor com 30 Status bar communicating correctly with server If the client application has established a connection with the engine editor on the left side of the bar you ll see a green indicator and a text stating that the server is active and communicating correctly through the address and port given If the customer cannot establish the connection with the server engine editor this will also be indicated Server not found or inactive 192 168 1 11 80 Status bar not communicating with the server The fact that the client is unable to establish such a connection may be d
323. t has the physical address introduced in the previous field If it is possible to assign an IP address to the converter the following dialogue box will appear Device configuration 2 5 ModbusTCP E IF address 132 168 Netmask 255 255 Gateway 80 8 Automatically obtain IP address DHCP x Cancel to finish setting up the rest of the parameters for communication with the device 76 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 11 Converter TCP2RS QNA RS485 The converter TCP2RS QNA RS485 connects QNA devices which work with serial communications RS 485 on Ethernet network using IP protocol Due to the peculiarities of the communication with QNA devices only QNA 412 and QNA 413 second level devices will be able to be connected to TCP2RS QNA RS485 first level devices For more information on how to add and configure this device see section 3 9 TCP2RS converter 77 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 12General UDP Converter The generic UDP converter connects devices that use serial communications RS 232 RS 485 to an Ethernet network using the IP protocol UDP for datagram communications New Generic UDP Name Description ee Converter address Part 10001 cr Advanced setup Accept Cancel Where e Name Alphanumeric field which uniquely identifies the device throughout the program There are no two devices in the configuration with the s
324. t is also possible to see the variables without discrimination or see them through another discriminator other than the default one 42 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 1 2 Variable Units Unit configuration CVM 96 Voltage Units C kV 9 ow Current Units C Active energy Units C MWh kWh Units kA Accuracy C without decimals 1 decimal Accuracy Without decimals 1 decimal 2 decimals 3 decimals Accuracy Without decimals 1 decimal 2 decimals 3 decimals variables will appear in A Accuracy Without decimals 1 decimal 2 decimals 3 decimals Frequency Units Hz Active apparent power Units COMMI fe pow Reactive energy Units C MyarCh MyarLh kvarEh kvarLh Accuracy Without decimals 1 decimal Accuracy C Without decimals decimal C 2 decimals 3decimals Accuracy C Without decimals decimal C 2 decimals 3decimals Distortion Units Reactive power Units KwarC KvarL Harmonics Units a g Cancel Using this dialogue the units can be configured and number of decimals with which to display the variables on screen This type of configuration does not affect the equipment being used only for displaying the values on screen Current Units Accuracy C t without decimals fe A deci
325. t password Enables the password to be enabled or deactivated to block the configuration of the device by the keyboard Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Voltage 1 i E Curent 5 Depending on the version connected programming of the voltage transformation ratio can be disabled e Voltage transformation ratio Primary and secondary voltage programming The product between the primary value and primary current has to be equal or less than 20 000 000 The value of the primary depending on the full scale of the equipment must be between 1 and the value of the following table Fullscale background Maximum value 110v 99 999 275 70 000 300v 70 000 e Current transformation ratio This is the primary current value the device has The value can be between 1 and 10 000 A The secondary current is 5A on the CVM 96 M aximeter Period 1 Unit Current per phase Zx Maximeter reset e Period Is the integration period of the maximeter that can oscillate between 1 and 60 minutes Unit The maximum demand can be calculated with active power lll apparent power Ill current IIl or phase current depending on the device e Maximeter reset When the button is enabled the device maximeter goes to zero 86 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Distortion calculation THD Effective value C D fundamental Using this selector the type of distortion can be configured that the device will calcu
326. t the representation is in lines by default Only variables of this type may be added to this type of graph 1 waveforms Graph QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER9 23 08 12 50 00 PM PowerStudio Scada n pm bd Options Views General Previous v Lees Screens Reports Graph Table 5 Events 52 Properties Print QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER 9 23 08 12 50 00 PM Voltage wave form L1 V Voltage wave form L2 V Voltage wave form L3 V Current wave form L1 A Current wave form L2 A Current wave form L3 1 078 2 157 3 137 4 216 5 294 6 275 7 353 8431 9 412 10 449 11 569 12 549 14 706 15 686 16 765 17 843 18 824 19 90 mm 12 Go to Server Ok powerstudio cir cutor com 80 Waveform graph of a Another special graph is the event duration graph 276 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Graph QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER6 1 08 12 00 00 AM 7 1 08 12 00 00 PowerStudio Scada pm bd Options Views General Qo Previous v g Devices Screens E Reports Va Graph Table Events Properties 2 Print QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER 6 1 08 12 00 00 AM 7 1 08 12 00 00 AM Events Duration L1 Events Duration L2 Events Duration L3 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Qo Back Next 12 Goto f Grouped by Server powerstudio circutor com 80 m QNA event duration graph This type of graph represents the voltage events registe
327. tals 8 Inputs 4 Outputs Digital inputs Digital outputs Output equations 1 02 0304 pu 2 16 154 144 134124 114 10 09 pu 3 os 00 00 10 00 00 o0 00 4 4 gt Alarms Where for each of the outputs the output equation will be defined This output equation corresponds to a conditional expression to decide when the device should act on the digital output depending on the alarms configured Configuration of alarms for use in the output equation Clicking on the button the following dialogue will appear Alarm configuration Variable Maximum Minimum Delay Delay off 4 voltage L12 or L23 or L31 V pe p 5 Capacitive power L1 kvarc HS 0 n fo 7 50 6 Apparent power L1 Kva Jo nn p p 7 wf de de do mjewetizt Off active power 24 12 Inductive power L2 kvarL fc Capacitive power 2 vo fg 14 Apparent power L2 Kva 7 7 wD fff festa fg Accept Cancel Where the 16 device alarms can be configured Variable In this field any of the parameters associated with the alarm can be selected and any of the parameters measured by the device The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are indicated in brackets The maximum value to control is configured
328. the PC Configure prealarm Type of prealarm relay Normally open Normally closed Prealarm threshold 90 The following can be configured of pre alarm relay Operation method of the pre alarm relay common to all channels of the device Pre alarm threshold Pre alarm threshold the equipment possesses This can vary between 50 and 100 of the minimum trigger threshold of the device channels Defined values Current 0 Delay time s 0 A trigger threshold and a personalized delay time can be configured by user These parameters are common to all channels of the device Depending on the type of channel selected the customised threshold may be selected or not Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel Channel 8 Description of relay output IDhamel f Normally open Normally closed Type of toroid Number of reclasures 30 m WG AVES Trip threshold Time between reclosing s 10 05 i of time between reclosing Delay time s Normal Instantaneous f Exponential 56 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Shows the channel configuration Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel E Channel Channel 3 it is only possible to display the configuration of one channel at a time click on one of the channels to display the corresponding configuration Description
329. the tariff works Input 1 Made Pulses State Pulses number 99 999 Configuration of one of the inputs when the operating mode is digital inputs Inputs may be treated as pulse counters by selecting the Pulse mode the parameter number of pulses will correspond to the multiplicative factor of pulses counted at the input When the selected mode is Status it will show the input status open or closed and will disable the corresponding counter Pulses meters EJ Reset Clicking this button will reset the device counter As long as the working mode is digital inputs and the input mode is configured in pulses 148 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 32 MK LCD 3 32 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options MK Driver parameters Device parameters Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 32 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC MK LCD configuration Device Information Partial energy meter Peripheral number 25 ME LCD D
330. this case the file is HaspUpdate 1740475424 v2c which can be found in root directory on your hard drive 4 Click on the Update button and wait until the end of the update 29 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Whenever necessary an update should be made carrying out the steps described previously The file sent by your distributor with the extension v2c will only serve for one update which is why after the update it can be deleted It will only be possible to update USB keys It will not be possible to update parallel keys 2 2 12 2 User Authentication This section will explain how remote user access to the resources of the application can be configured A series of profiles are defined These profiles contain the resources that can be accessed a resource can be assigned to more than one profile Similarly users are defined as those who are authorised to access the application resources Each user will have a name and a password enabling the application to identify them avoiding non authorised user access Each authorised user will be assigned one or more profiles allowing access to all the resources contained in profiles A profile can be assigned to more than one different user Finally the access to an anonymous user can be enabled This anonymous user will not have a name or a password allowing access to any remote user without a need for identification Similarly one or more profiles will be assigned to the r
331. tions The following is the options menu Options Gas 2 Driver parameters Device parameters y step Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 16 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CVM 96 configuration Device Information Password Peripheral number Model Enable password 3 Password Identifier Version LV M BE 6 16 password Description Transformation ratio Masimeter Period Primary Secundary n Voltage Unit Current per phase Current Zx Maximeter reset Distortion calculation Energy counters taii d ___ 1 Reset fundamental Variable Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 vj n 00 50 Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 2 Voltage L2 v 50 1 0 0 Accept Cancel Alarms 85 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Device Informatian Peripheral number 96 Identifier Version A M 35 5 15 Description Shows general information Password Enable password Password Repea
332. tive power generated CVM K2 LX LX X X X X X X X X X x CVM MIN ee a 3 CVMNRG96 X X X X X X X X X X X X Instantaneous Minimum E3 cm O ls MINT OX X X 9 X X o X X 9 1 x X Heec X Xx 296 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada QNAN O0 jJ OT OT t 3p Hn qp Capacitive power generated Instantaneous Maximum Minimum Inductive Power consumed Instantaneous L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3 IPI2 IPMX1 IPMX2 MEN RENE Oox x x x x POWERNET Inductive power generated L1 L2 L3 Hl L1 L2 L3 Hl L1 L2 L3 Hl CVM K2 X X oe xcd ee IEEE CVM MINI xx ox amp i ex 7 3 ee CVM NRG 96 Of of y FEE NENNEN Power factor consumed L1 L2 L3 Hl L1 L2 L3 Hl L1 L2 L3 Hl PFI3 PFI PFMX X L1 L2 L3 m L1 L2 m L1 L2 L3 M O O j O CVM K2 CVM MINI p n qo gu p gj X CVMNRG96 X j qp ex 297 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Cos generated L1 L2 L1 2 Jr L1 2 13 NCOSMN2 NCOSMN BEER GAME NEUE NUBE
333. to configure them may or may not appear 3 20 1 2 1 Digital input output Depending on the card model the number of inputs and outputs may vary CVMk configuration Expansion card Digitals 8 Inputs 4 Outputs Digital inputs Digital outputs Tvpe Mame Unit Factor Da gt OS Accept Cancel By way of 9 109119000 the Configuration between the input configuration and the output configuration of the card may be changed The previous image shows the configuration of the digital inputs Each of the digital inputs may be configured as a digital input and therefore the status of the input can be monitored open or closed or used as a counter counting the number of pulses that occur in the digital input Configuring the input as digital Tvpe Mame Unit Factor The type should be selected as digital Name Alphanumeric data type for the identification of the digital entry on the device display Otherwise it will be configured as a counter Type Mame Unit Factor Type Must be selected as a counter type Alphanumeric type data to identity the counter on the device display Alphanumeric type data to identify that this counter is a counter Factor Multiplicative value of each pulse detected at the input The configuration of the digital outputs is as follows 105 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada CVMk configuration Expansion card Digi
334. to access them either through the client provided or the embedded client application in the webpage such as a Java applet 223 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada N B lt is necessary to switch over to the Run mode for the Web server to be enabled and so it can be accessed through the client application provided or through the applet embedded in the website CVM144 Izquierda PowerStudio Scada Options Views General o Previous Next v Devices fal Screens Reports Graph b Events Properties Print CVM1 44 Izquierda 9 18 08 10 12 35 AM Instantaneous T Maximums Minimums Harmonics L1 12 L3 Voltage Power Active KW Phase neutral V 5 rr F5 Loue EC Inductive kvarL Apparent Power factor Total distortion 96 Cosine Phi Frequency Hz 50 0 Phase phase V 0 0 0 0 0 0 Maximum demand Current Maximum demand KW Current A Neutral current A E nalog inputs Analog input 1 Total distortion 96 Analog input 2 Energy Analog input 3 Active KWh Digital outputs Capacitive kvarCh Digital output 1 Closed Inductive kvarLh Digital output 2 Opened Maximum minimum reset Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 Client application 224 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Power Studio Windows Internet Explorer DEK 69 Y n http localhost 8080 html index html Search ve G
335. ton on the bottom toolbar 100 2 150 2 200 2 250 2 300 2 350 2 400 G 450 2 500 Zoom Zoom Menu The option Adjust makes the current page fit completely into the active view maintaining the ratio aspect If we choose an option that causes the page not to fit into the view scrollbars will appear to enable us to move around the actual page 236 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada DDEnglish PowerStudio Scada Options Views General Previous next T Weekly report Important information Data are related to structure integration Next 12 Goto f Grouped by Zoom Server Ok 192 168 5 52 8080 View of the report with a 150 zoom The user can change the grouping period referred to the report at any time This is carried out using the Grouped by option on the toolbar f Grouped by Grouped by Option As can be seen the application provides quick access to daily weekly monthly quarterly and annual reports If the user wishes to make a report of a period that is not included in any of those pre defined it can be done by selecting the Go option on the toolbar 237 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada From date From time 5 4108 1 2 00 00 AM To date To time 8H 1 08 1 2 00 00 AM Selection window of the interval for the report In this window the user can exactly specify the period over which you want to make the report Thus the user c
336. trols are implemented Thus using the tools 1 controls may be entered on the SCADA screen 3 whose properties may be configured in the information panel 2 When creating a new SCADA screen the properties of the configuration of the background of the SCADA screen on the information panel will appear by default These properties are the same as those which appear if at any time there no control is selected 195 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Show grid Background image Maintain real size Maintain aspect ratio Alignment BN Stews Show grid option enables the grid which indicates the position of objects on the screen to be shown or hidden If the grid is shown the object will automatically align at the points of the grid Background image See eee By selecting this option one of the images added to the image manager may be selected see section 2 2 6 Image Manager in order to appear on the SCADA screen as a background Image selection Sele Select the image to be used Energy 1 General Screen 1 Switches LINIFIL2 UNIFILS Accept Cancel Click on this button to delete the present background image Maintainreal sie f this option is enabled the image configured as the background image is displayed in its actual size If disabled this will be adapted to the margins of the SCADA screen v Maintain aspect r
337. ts and Variable Limits are detailed in 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 2 Variable limits 3 2 1 1 Device parameters In the case of C 14d it will not be possible to configure any parameters of the device only information about it will be shown C 14d configuration Device Information Peripheral number 90 C 14d Identifier Version 14d 3 Description Transformation ratio Primary Secundary Curent Setup First capacitor current A Disconnection time s 1 50 Cos setpoint Connection time tT 10 Distortion factor Capacitors number 0 10 Voltage phase Connection sequence te 1 1 1 x Cancel 45 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 2 2 Displaying Values This part can be observed in the operation mode Run using the Java Client to display it This C 14d device will show the following value screen variables 1 Cuadrante de energ a Corriente 2 3 Generada Distorsi n total THD 2 Alarma 5 Alarma de compensaci n CE Salidas digitales Where 1 Instant values measured by the device 2 Energy Quadrant e Tl Inductive dk Capacitive Cos Phi 1 3 Description that indicates if the energy is consumed or generated 4 Alarm status _ Status OFF Alarm disabled Status ON Alarm enabled 5 Description of the enabled alarm Will not appear if no alarms are enabled 6 Status of the output relays E gt R
338. tude once for ascending order and twice for descending order This will order the table by group and within each group by size QNA equipment allows a special table to be made called Events that lets you view a list of events recorded by the equipment This table can only be viewed from the corresponding button on the monitoring screen of the equipment and does not correspond with any graph view 281 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Yt Table Date time QNA_QUALITY_NETWORK_ANALYZER Events PowerStudio Scada Options Views General v g Devices Screens Reports 28 Graph Table gt Events de Properties gt Print 1 abril 2008 30 abril 2008 Date time QUALITY NETWORK ANALYZER Events U UT J3 T WI ueatuvaueu 4 19 08 6 14 01 Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated 120 08 7 32 18 AM Digital input 1 deactivated 120 08 7 44 28 AM Digital input 1 activated 4 20 08 8 02 31 AM Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Digital input 1 activated Digital input 1 deactivated Dig
339. tudio Scada The option Logout allows us to leave the session in which the user is authenticated at the time This option appears only if the authentication on the engine is enabled and the user correctly enters the required user name and password at some point The option of Language allows you to change the language of the client ay O Nederlands English D 2 Catala 2 e tina AM and fool l 2 francais 2 Deutsch 2 Espanol Language Menu The languages available are provided by the engine editor On executing the client application and connecting to the server engine editor the list of available languages is requested as well as texts relating to the local language of the machine where the customer is running If the server does not have the client language it will request the texts relative to the language in which the server is configured The option Look and feel allows you to customize the appearance of the client application windows and the interface generally ur 75 Look and feel Metal C CDEMotif 1 About D Windows Windows Classic Look and feel Menu The first time the client application runs it does so under Metal appearance which is available for any environment where it runs However depending on the environment other aspects of the application will be available and the user can even install others fro
340. uctive power Apparent power Power factor Cosine Phi Maximum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy x Cancel Selection of variables to make a standard graph without the CVM 144 discriminator Here the variables we want to form part of the graph are chosen This screen will depend on the device the type of graph required and the discriminator we want to implement these variables 250 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada For example if a discriminator is chosen a screen similar to the following may be found Variables selection CVM144 Izquierda v wg Variables Instantaneous Maximum demand Active energy Capacitive energy Inductive energy Discriminated variable Selection of discriminated standard variables If we select a non standard type of graph for example a harmonics graph we find a screen for selecting variables like the following iil Harmonics Harmonic variables selection screen Finally once the selection of variables we want to display has been carried out the view of the graph with the representation of the variables in question will appear
341. ue to the following Causes e The IP address or port is incorrect The IP address or port the client is addressing for the server is not correct check what the IP address is and the port where the engine editor is configured e The engine editor is not running Make sure the server program namely the engine editor is running on the machine the client application is trying to connect to e The engine editor is not in running mode Make sure the engine editor is in the running mode as in the edit mode communication will not be permitted e The engine editor is not enabled as a web server Make sure that the engine editor has managed to boot the web server on the specified port Apart from these indications the status bar will inform about the status of communications with devices defined in the program indicating whether there is any impact on communications with any device using the corresponding icon on the right side of the status bar specifically in the left square El servidor est activo 192 168 1 12 80 e FN Status bar communicating with the server but with errors in communication with the devices and active events The incidences in communications are transmitted by two icons e Error in communications There has been some kind of error in communications either because of a device or a connection This icon encompasses several individual incidences as detailed in Status of the devices Devices
342. urrent threshold Information about the configured trigger time Adjustment button Displays channel information and allows some parameters to be modified Reset button If the channel is not tripped the button will remain disabled Push the button to restart the channel Off button Enables remote triggering of the channel to be made If the channel is tripped the button will remain disabled Value of instant leakage current If the value exceeds the limits of the values bar either over or under an arrow below the value will indicate this Trigger threshold value configured for the channel Pre alarm value configured for the channel 160 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 35 2 1 2 RGU 10 RA The RGU RA 10 device will show the following value screen Where pe 12 13 14 15 Protection state e Reconnection enabled 3 Reclasing status Meter 5 y wu o ma LE Cut element 8 Shortcircuit Id 0 1 A 9 11 Adjust td 500 ms 13 10 2 Reset Protection status Not tripped Tripped Additional information on the protection status Information that appears only when the reclosure is enabled Leakage current value detected in the channel trigger This information will be visible only when the channel is tripped Reclosure status or channel latching indicator Normal 9 Blinking The device is timing the r
343. using the wizard gt button see appendix 14 2 1 Wizard for the creation of expressions and conditions On entering the formula it will be automatically analysed and where it can be used will be shown For example Formula Furnace 1 11 Screen Graph Events Reports Table can be used on SCADA screen and reports to make graphs and tables with the values obtained it can be used in the event conditions but a discriminator cannot be applied The calculated variables are codified for their use in formulas and expressions like R CAL_group variable Using the prefix R CAL the program will know that this is a calculated variable rather than the variable of a device group will correspond to the name of the group to which the calculated variable belongs and finally variable to the identifier entered in the field corresponding to the calculated variable 178 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 7 Reports The Reports option from the set up menu enables templates for reports to be designed 7 1 Add modify and delete reports To create modify or delete reports the Reports option from the Configure menu should be clicked Then several options will appear depending if the reports have been previously created Devices Device groups Discriminabars Calculated variables Styles Manager images Mew Screen Report 1 Events timetables Report 2 Groups of events Report 3 Events Preferences
344. ut 1 Current L3 4 Im 0 Output 2 Active power L1 E Im 0 Depending on the device connected if it has analogue outputs the desired values can be configured e Variable Parameter associated to the analogue output Any parameter measured by CVM B BD can be selected as an analogue output e Zero Value of the parameter to which the zero of the scale is assigned Fullscale Value of the parameter to which maximum value of the scale is assigned e Type of input permits either 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA to be chosen 91 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 3 18 CVM BC 3 18 1 Driver options The following is the options menu Options CVM BC Driver parameters Device parameters y step Variable units Variable limits The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits 3 18 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC CVM BC configuration Device Information Password Peripheral number Model Enable password 14 Password Identifier Version 4 03 Repeat password Description Transformation ratio Masim
345. vM 144 Name Gas 1 Description P Peripheral number 1 Device parameters LI Variable limits Contains general information about the device selected on the tree 1 and different device settings 2 These settings can be found only on edit and are hidden when the software is running and will also be accessible by clicking the Options button on the toolbar 2 4 3 Display options Contains the parameters to modify the Java client display screens of the device values This menu option will depend on what is being shown on the screen and will be explained in the corresponding sections when the devices tables and graphs are explained 2 4 4 Toolbar With this option the toolbar can be displayed or hidden This bar contains the main elements of the View menu if oc Devices Screen Reports cer Options Back See section 2 4 1 Devices See section 2 4 2 Screen See section 2 2 8 Reports See section 2 2 7 Options See section 2 4 3 VVVVV 39 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 2 4 5 Status Bar With this option the status bar can be displayed or hidden To the right of the bar is a series of icons showing where necessary information on the status of the program Double clicking on the corresponding icon will show additional information on the meaning of each one of them The icons shown are Initialisation of devices Shown while starting communication with the devices
346. validation timetable of the event can be defined That is the periods in which the event is not valid can be defined and therefore will not be taken into account in the software It will also be possible to associate a note each time that the event in enabled for example to save the value of a variable which has caused the event Finally for each of the possible states of the events a series of actions can be defined that the software will execute while the event is found in each one of these states Possible States are e Activation Will be produced when the event condition is complied with For example a value has exceeded a certain limit e While enabled This will be produced while the event condition is complied with once the event has been enabled e Recognition Occurs when the operator carries out an event recognition action This state is only possible if the incident is reported e Disable or restore Occurs when the event condition is no longer fulfilled For example if an event is defined such as the variable exceeds a certain value the disabling will take place when it ceases to exceed that value The system event set up consists of event disablement calendars groups of events and the events themselves If you have no need to define groups of events or event disablement calendars go directly to section 10 3 Event Configuration Both timetables and groups can be defined before or after the definition of the events them
347. variables such as voltage and current are included in the corresponding variable table Billing closures absolute energy Contract x x 1 1 3 Tariff y y 1 9 Total AEABSCXTy IEABSCxTy CEABSCxTy AEABSCxTOT IEABSCxTOT CEABSCxTOT X X X X X X CIRWATT Total Billing closures Power Contract x x 1 1 3 Tariff y 1 9 Maximum Maximum Power excesses Power factor Power excesses Power factor demand demand MDCxTy EXCCxTy PFCxTy MDCxTOT EXCCxTOT FPCxTOT CIRWATT The power factor variable is calculated by the software using active and inductive energy Power Contract x x 1 1 3 Tariff and y 1 9 Contracted Excesses by register CPWCxTy REXCCxTy CIRWATT Power Excesses are calculated by the software for each curve register downloaded onto CIRWATT equipment 304 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 11 5 CVM K2 The following shows the specific variables of the CVM K2 devices the shared variables such as voltage and current are included in the corresponding variable table Voltage Voltage pom TI TMX TMN CVM K2 L3 KFAB KFAMXi KFAMX2 KFAMXS KFAMNi X X 14 1 11 6 DH 96 Active energy APMX APMN DH 96 CPM X X X X Off peak F1 DH 96 AC E ae E eee ee MINER 14 1 11 7 MK D X Active tariff Digital input D
348. vate lf Active events ASS Language Password Server URL English 192 168 5 52 Web server Port aua Repeat password Number of ASS items 20 W Save system s event Authentification Client application 3 Configurate mail server o Enable menu and toolbar W Activate user authentification Start screen Git Updates Setup users None Accept Cancel In Web server the port will be specified that is enabled for accessing remote computer By default the value is 80 although it may be altered at will The programme will warn if the value entered is not correct PowerStudio Scada AN Incorrect web server pork Pork must be 80 or between 1025 and 65535 N B The default port 80 should remain as such and it must not be the PC itself where the programme is executed whether there is a Web server or another application making use of this port In such a case any other available port should be configured If the communications engine was unable to execute the web server the following warning icon would appear on the status bar bottom right If the application is minimized in the execution mode and the web server is unable to start the following warning will appear in the status bar of Windows N B lf the box Activate user authentication is enabled all access restrictions to device value screens SCADA screens etc It will be applied to the remote user application trying
349. vating Iv Publish on recognizing Arguments Formula 1 Furnace 1 V11 Add Modify a Delete w Accept Cancel Disable according to Ss Business week Allowing the disable timetable of the event to be selected If no timetable is selected the event will always be supervised by the application If an event has selected a disable timetable if the event is active and for calendar reasons it becomes disabled the event will be disabled 214 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Delay in activating seconds 0 This value corresponds to the delay in activating the event in seconds The event will be enabled when the activation condition is fulfilled for at least the time shown in this field For example if the activation delay is 5 seconds to activate the event the activation condition must be met for at least 5 consecutive seconds if the conditions are met for 4 seconds the event would not be enabled Delay in desactivating seconds This value corresponds to the delay in the deactivation of the event in seconds The event will be deactivated if when enabled the activation condition no longer fulfils at least the time shown in this field in a similar way to the delayed activation Associate text main voltage is upper 240 watts Brief description of the event Allows an annotation to be configured which will be calculated when the event is enabled and which may serve
350. ver parameters Device parameters Hep E Variable units Variable limits P Expansion card Expansion card Digitals 4 Digital outputs f 4 8 Inputs 4 Outputs Analog outputs Expansion card 50 memory The option Driver Parameter has been detailed in section 3 1 1 Driver Parameters When the device has an SD Memory expansion card inserted the data capture period will be configured in the option Device parameters The options Variable Units and Variable Limits are detailed in sections 3 1 2 Variable units and 3 1 3 Variable limits The Expansion Card options will depend on the expansion card inserted in the device 3 20 1 1 Device parameters This screen allows the internal parameters of the device to be configured On opening the dialogue box the software will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC 99 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada CVMk2 configuration Device Information Device Peripheral number Model Measure point C Mk2 IT F 406 K2 Capture period min Identifier Version 10 CVM k2 1 02 Reset Description 4 Synchronize clack Transformation ratio Masimeter Primary Secundary Period n 5 Voltage 00 i n Window type Current 50 5 Sliding Neutral current 5 Zx Maximeter reset
351. vice 292 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 1 1 Voltage L2 EIE RE E EA ee ee a rom VI2 VI3 pde mn xg X CVM BC Phase phase voltage L1 L2 L3 WI L1 L2 L3 wn L1 L2 WM LEOIRWATE qi ed 144 X X X X X X X X X CVWMM96 Xx X X J X X X J X X X CWMMBBD X X X X j j Jj J J gm jJ LOVMBC x x x x x x x J HOVMK x 9 qp X x 9 1 X qp X qn x x x x x x x CVMK HAR _ I qy CVM MINI X X X X X CVM NRG 96 MK LCD POWERNET QNA lt lt lt gt lt 18 i 1 1 Neutral voltage VNMX VNMN ucc CVM K2 Lower percentile 596 voltage All registers Valid registers L 0 Jg o Jg o p O SE Higher percentile 9596 voltage EMEN Oa ee 293 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Absolute maximum Voltage All registers Valid registers __ VIMAXT V3MAXT VIMAXV V2MAXV lt lt V3MAXV V1MAXT V2MAXT V3MAXT V1MAXV V2MAXV V3MAXV BOUMBIBBEC A Or ie er se xe CVMK X
352. vide us with a view of the graph with default configuration namely a graph grouped as a week set at the current week with 30 minute periods with three areas of representation one where all three voltages are placed another where the distortion is placed and a final one where the two currents are placed etc Graph MAIN PowerStudio Scada u m bd Options Views General Previous v g Devices Screens Reports Va Graph Table Events 3 Properties Print MAIN I Voltage L1 V Voltage L2 V E Voltage L3 V a T k 140 I EN 120 V THD d L1 96 Current L1 A Current L2 A 15 Sep 2008 o Back Next 172 Goto Grouped by 4 Period Server Ok powerstudio circutor com 30 Graph with variables from To change the graph properties we access the option previously indicated and a window similar to the following will appear 263 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada V MAII 88 0 234 0 Voltage L1 Voltage L2 Voltage L3 96 MAIN 1 0 2 5 V THD d L1 MAIN 78 7 521 6 Current 1 1 Current L2 Properties window of a graph This window will allow us to make the following changes on the graph Modify the representation of each variable lines bars and points e Change the colour of each variable e Modify the y axis margins e Remove areas axes and variables Add areas axes and variable e Change the
353. ways remains visible and are shown automatically without user intervention when there are events reported active or to be recognised or both The information displayed by this window is very similar to that shown in the active events window but in addition to showing the activation date and the name of the event the date is shown when it was recognised by the user and the date it was disabled Notified events Activated 8 23 08 4 51 33 9 23 08 4 51 37 PM 8 23 08 4 51 28 PM 02308 4 51 31 Ocupaci n preocu 9 23 08 4 51 23 8 23 08 4 51 26 Description El sensor A424 lleva ocupado mas de 10 minutos Annotation que poner w Acknowledge events Reported events window Note that an event with an acknowledgement date and a deactivation date will disappear from the list of events reported i e there will be events on this list without an acknowledgement register without a disable date without both dates but not with both dates This window allows event recognition To do this select from the list the events you want to recognize and click the button at the bottom Recognize events You will see listed the recognition date for the event When an event is disabled this will disappear from the list If an event which has already been recognized is recognised again the operation will not produce any effect 288 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 12 2 12 Authentication If the engine e
354. will read the configuration of the device When complete click on Accept for the software to send information on changes to the device In no case will the information be stored on the hard drive of the PC Driver configuration CVM 144 Device Information Password M aximeter Peripheral number Model Enable password Period Window type 5 CVM 144 111 pod 15 Fixed Identifier Version CvM144 6 15 Repeat password Active power Description Ax reset Alarms Transformation ratio Variable Minimum Primary Secundary 1 L1 v T Voltage E i Variable Minimum 2 Molaml2W 220 0 Current 5 Analog outputs Distortion calculation Fullscale Variable Type THO Effective value 1 Voltage L1 228 232 020m B tondanerisl 2 Reactive power L1 k ar 125 323 4 20m 3 Curent L3 5 D 20m Earth leakage current Energy counters 4 Active power L1 kw 65 D 20m 3 Reset C 304 Units Neutral t 1 junit 0 CHUTE 2 junit n 3 Analog inputs Fullscale Decimal point Transformation ratio 3999 a Cancel 81 device PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Depending on the device connected some of the fields can be disabled Device Information Peripheral number C M 1 44 111 Identifier Version CYM144 6 15 Description Sh
355. ximeter goes to zero Energy counters Tariff 1 T ariff 2 Tariff 3 Active energy 580611 1817 Me O Inductive energy oO oO oO Capacitive energy 1184837 59775 38071 OO Active energy 2898012430 169632502 228368827 Inductive energy oO oO Capacitive energy 130414599 30307830 oo200450 Load values in device meters This part of the configuration corresponds to device energies Depending on the type of device some or all of the fields can be deactivated If the selector is checked on sending configuration the energy counter will be loaded with the values entered into the corresponding boxes Alarms Variable Maximum Minimum Delay Alarm 1 Voltage L1 v jo a Variable hd asinum Miniman Delay Alarm 2 Voltage L2 v 0 0 T 90 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada Depending on the device connected if this has relay outputs they can be configured with the values desired e Variable Parameter associated to the output relay The output is programmed as an alarm allowing control on any of the parameters measured by the CVM B BD The units in which the maximum and minimum values of the alarm are expressed are indicated in brackets e Max In this box the maximum value to control is indicated e Min In this box the minimum value to control is indicated e Delay Alarm delay in seconds The maximum value is 9999 seconds Analog outputs Variable ero Fullscale Type Outp
356. xt in accordance with a condition using as in the previous case the conditional control 328 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 14 4 20 How can know the status of a device All devices have a variable called STATUS that shows the status of the device using a numerical value for example CVM144 STATUS The meaning of this variable is the same for all devices and can be used in the conditional expressions see the appendix to check the types of variables and their possible values 14 4 21 How can display documents from SCADA screen To show documents previously stored on the PC the run control can be used If we wish to show a PDF file we can enter its name directly including the complete path in the program field so that the said file will open in the related defined programme when running the screen and clicking on the control Likewise we can do this with any file type which has an associated programme to open it DOC TXT HTML WAV MP3 MPG AVI etc Note This option will not work on systems which do not run Windows nor when using the applet 14 4 22 How can I obtain an event according to status of a device To produce an event according to the status of one or more devices using the STATUS variable of the said devices in the event activation status The possible values of the STATUS variable can be seen in the variable type appendix Since the events generate a number of variables associated to them we c
357. y time from one of the following values to be selected 5 Configure prealarm Prealarm threshold Activation delay s Disabled 1075 Prealarm relay output polarity Operating mode f Standard f f Positive Recoverable It will be possible to configure the pre alarm following parameters Pre alarm threshold Where can of the nominal current can be defined to activate the pre alarm this value will vary between 50 and 90 e Delay time on activation Enable the time delay in activating the pre alarm to be selected from among the following values 157 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada 10 00s e Polarity of the pre alarm relay output e Pre alarm operating mode 3 35 1 1 2RGU 10 RA RGU 10 configuration Device Information Peripheral number 36 AGU 10 Identifier Version RA 1 2 Description Operating system frequency Trigger current A Trigger delay s 3 500 ms Reconnections Times Latch output polarity Reconnection sequence by leakage 10 1 10 60 Normally open t Normally closed Reconnection sequence by shortcircuit 2 3 2 30 Operating mode Automatic reconnection disabled Normal Cut element Shorteircuit Accept Cancel Device Infarmatian Peripheral number 36 AGU 10 Identifier Version AGUIO R 12 Description Shows general information Operat
358. y times this event has been acknowledged or lt not applicable gt if the incident is not notified the fourth column indicates how many times it has been disabled and the fifth the total length which the event has been active 12 2 11 Active and notified events The powerStudio client enables events that are occurring at the moment to be viewed real time both the simple events that are active as well as those that also need to be recognized by the user The events that do not require user recognition are displayed in a pop up window that may be accessed via the menu option Views then Events and finally Active events or directly from the status bar clicking on the icon that informs us that there are active events in the system This window can be viewed from a SCADA screen where an active event control has been added Description El sensor A424 lleva ocupado mas 10 minutos Annotation que poner Active event window 287 PowerStudio PowerStudio Scada We can see the date on which the event was enabled and the name of it In addition below we can see the description that we have selected and the annotation scheduled for the same This window is purely informative and no action can be carried out here In addition it shows both those events that require recognition by the user as those which do not On the other hand the events that require recognition by the user are displayed in a pop up window that al
359. ynamic Data Exchange is a Windows protocol between applications The client mode can be used Request data from other applications and or server mode supply data to other applications The PowerStudio program operates in the server mode that is once communication is established with another Windows application Excel Paradox Word programs in C Visual Basic etc PowerStudio supplies this with the values read on the drivers For example voltage current etc can be seen in real time in Excel Those applications that allow a value to be forced through the DDE may modify a parameter of the driver such as digital outputs internal records etc The DDE communication established has the following characteristics E The link established is the hotlink type i e PowerStudio warns the client applications when the data has changed and the latter will request it if necessary S The program can send data via DDE to several applications the only limitation is the memory capacity of the PC For each client a link is established for each of the variables requested MS The DDE protocol consists basically of three elements The Conversation the topic and the item Conversation Conversation is a text that distinguishes whether the applications must be unique per application This allows no cross questions and answers from various applications In our case PWSTDValues For example PWSTDValues Device1 VI1 Topic The Top

POWERSTUDIO SCADA USER MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents